Brother MFC 6490CW User Manual

USER’S GUIDE  
MFC-6490CW  
Version 0  
USA/CAN  
Brother numbers  
IMPORTANT  
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be  
made from within that country.  
Register your product  
By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be recorded as the  
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:  
may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;  
may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,  
will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.  
Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration And Test Sheet or, for your  
convenience and most efficient way to register your new product, register on-line at  
FAQs (frequently asked questions)  
The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax Machine/Multi-Function  
Center needs. You can download the latest software documents and utilities, read FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips, and learn how to get the most from your Brother product.  
Note  
• You can check here for Brother driver updates.  
• To keep your machine performance up to date, check here for the latest firmware upgrade (for  
®
Windows only).  
For Customer Service  
In USA:  
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)  
1-901-379-1215 (fax)  
In Canada:  
1-877-BROTHER  
(514) 685-4898 (fax)  
Service Center Locator (USA only)  
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437).  
Service Center Locations (Canada only)  
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.  
i
       
Ordering accessories and supplies  
For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are available at most Brother  
retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover, or  
American Express credit card, you can order accessoriesdirectly from Brother. (You can visit us online  
for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and supplies that are available for purchase.)  
Note  
In Canada only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.  
In USA:  
1-877-552-MALL (1-877-552-6255)  
1-800-947-1445 (fax)  
In Canada:  
1-877-BROTHER  
Description  
Item  
LC61BK 1  
LC65HY-BK 1  
LC61C 1  
Ink Cartridge Standard <black>  
Ink Cartridge High Yield <black>  
Ink Cartridge <cyan> (blue)  
LC65HY-C 1  
LC61M 1  
Ink Cartridge High Yield <cyan> (blue)  
Ink Cartridge <magenta> (red)  
Ink Cartridge High Yield <magenta> (red)  
Ink Cartridge <yellow>  
LC65HY-M 1  
LC61Y 1  
LC65HY-Y 1  
Ink Cartridge High Yield <yellow>  
Premium Plus Glossy Finish Photo Paper  
(Ledger size / 20 sheets)  
(Letter size / 20 sheets)  
(4"×6" size / 20 sheets)  
Matte Finish Inkjet Paper  
(Letter size / 25 sheets)  
Plain Finish Inkjet Paper  
(Ledger size / 100 sheets)  
(Letter size / 250 sheets)  
Telephone Line Cord  
BP71GLGR  
BP71GLTR  
BP71GP  
BP60ML (USA only)  
BP60PLGR (USA only)  
BP60PL (USA only)  
LG3077001 (USA only)  
User's Guide  
LS5741001 (English for USA and Canada)  
LS5741002 (French for Canada)  
1
For more information about the replacement consumables, visit us at www.brother.com/pageyield.  
ii  
   
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties  
(USA and Canada)  
BROTHER'S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS  
(COLLECTIVELY BROTHER'S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER'S  
LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS  
REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF  
ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE  
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS  
ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY  
SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION  
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER'S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY  
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR  
LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS  
INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER'S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN  
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY  
TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER'S LICENSOR'S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL  
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE  
ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT  
LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.  
Compilation and Publication Notice  
Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,  
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.  
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without  
notice.  
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials  
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused  
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors  
relating to the publication.  
iii  
 
®
Brother Two-Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service  
(USA Only)  
Who is covered:  
3 Damage caused by another device or  
software used with this Product (including  
but not limited to damage resulting from  
use of non Brother -brand parts and  
Consumable and Accessory Items);  
4 Consumable and Accessory Items that  
expired in accordance with a rated life;  
5 Problems arising from other than defects in  
materials or workmanship; and,  
6 Normal Periodic Maintenance Items, such  
as Paper Feeding Kit, Fuser and Laser  
Units.  
This limited warranty is VOID if this Product  
has been altered or modified in any way  
(including but not limited to attempted warranty  
repair without authorization from Brother  
and/or alteration/removal of the serial  
number).  
This limited warranty (“warranty”) is given  
only to the original end-use/retail purchaser  
(referred to in this warranty as “Original  
Purchaser”) of the accompanying product,  
consumables and accessories (collectively  
referred to in this warranty as “this  
Product”).  
If you purchased a product from someone  
other than an authorized Brother reseller in  
the United States or if the product was used  
(including but not limited to floor models or  
refurbished product), prior to your  
purchase you are not the Original  
Purchaser and the product that you  
purchased is not covered by this warranty.  
®
What is covered:  
This Product includes a Machine and  
Consumable and Accessory Items.  
Consumable and Accessory Items include  
but are not limited to print heads, toner,  
drums, ink cartridges, print cartridges,  
cordless handset battery, refill ribbons,  
therma PLUS paper and thermal paper.  
What to do if you think your Product is  
eligible for warranty service:  
Report your issue to either our Customer  
Service Hotline at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-  
276-8437) or to a Brother Authorized Service  
Center within the applicable warranty  
period. Supply Brother or the Brother  
Authorized Service Center with a copy of your  
dated bill of sale showing that this Product was  
purchased within the U.S. For the name of  
local Brother Authorized Service Center(s),  
call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) or  
Except as otherwise provided herein,  
Brother warrants that the Machine and the  
accompanying  
Consumable  
and  
Accessory Items will be free from defects in  
materials and workmanship, when used  
under normal conditions.  
This warranty applies only to products  
purchased and used in the United States.  
For products purchased in, but used  
outside, the United States, this warranty  
covers only warranty service within the  
United States (and does not include  
shipping outside the United States).  
What is the length of the Warranty Periods:  
Machines: two years from the original  
purchase date.  
Accompanying  
What Brother will ask you to do:  
After contacting Brother or  
a
Brother  
Authorized Service Center, you may be  
required to deliver (by hand if you prefer) or  
send the Product properly packaged, freight  
prepaid, to the Authorized Service Center  
together with a photocopy of your bill of sale.  
You are responsible for the cost of  
shipping, packing product, and insurance  
(if you desire). You are also responsible for  
loss or damage to this Product in shipping.  
Consumable  
and  
Accessory Items: 90 days from the original  
purchase date or the rated life of  
consumable, whichever comes first.  
What Brother will do:  
If the problem reported concerning your  
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable  
and Accessory Items is covered by this  
warranty and if you first reported the problem  
to Brother or an Authorized Service Center  
within the applicable warranty period, Brother  
or its Authorized Service Center will repair or  
replace the Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items at no  
charge to you for parts or labor. The decision  
as to whether to repair or replace the Machine  
and/or accompanying Consumable and  
Accessory Items is made by Brother in its sole  
What is NOT covered:  
This warranty does not cover:  
1 Physical damage to this Product;  
2 Damage caused by improper installation,  
improper or abnormal use, misuse, neglect  
or accident (including but not limited to  
transporting this Product without the proper  
preparation and/or packaging);  
iv  
 
®
Brother Two-Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service  
(USA Only)  
discretion. Brother reserves the right to supply  
a refurbished or remanufactured replacement  
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable  
and Accessory Items and use refurbished  
parts provided such replacement products  
conform to the manufacturer's specifications  
for new product/parts. The repaired or  
replacement Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items will be  
returned to you freight prepaid or made  
available for you to pick up at a conveniently  
located Authorized Service Center.  
If the Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items are not  
covered by this warranty (either stage), you  
will be charged for shipping the Machine  
and/or accompanying Consumable and  
Accessory Items back to you and charged for  
any service and/or replacement parts/products  
at Brother's then current published rates.  
the product; or (iv) the warranty period on your  
original Product has expired or has not been  
sufficiently validated with a copy of the proof of  
purchase (bill of sale). The replacement  
Machine you receive (even if refurbished or  
remanufactured) will be covered by the  
balance of the limited warranty period  
remaining on the original Product, plus an  
additional thirty (30) days. You will keep the  
replacement Machine that is sent to you and  
your original Machine shall become the  
property of Brother. Retain your original  
Accessory Items and a copy of the return  
freight bill, signed by the courier.  
Limitations:  
Brother is not responsible for damage to or  
loss of any equipment, media, programs or  
data related to the use of this Product. Except  
for the repair or replacement as described  
above, Brother shall not be liable for any  
direct, indirect, incidental or consequential  
damages or specific relief. Because some  
states do not allow the exclusion or limitation  
of consequential or incidental damages, the  
above limitation may not apply to you.  
The foregoing are your sole (i.e., only) and  
exclusive remedies under this warranty.  
What happens when Brother elects to  
replace your Machine:  
When a replacement Machine is authorized by  
Brother, and you have delivered the Machine  
to an Authorized Service Center, the  
Authorized Service Center will provide you with  
a replacement Machine after receiving one  
from Brother. If you are dealing directly with  
Brother’s Express Exchange Service Brother  
will send to you a replacement Machine  
shipped for receipt within two business days,  
with the understanding that you will, after  
receipt of the replacement Machine, supply the  
required proof of purchase information,  
together with the Machine that Brother agreed  
to replace. You are then expected to pack the  
Machine that Brother agreed to replace in the  
package from the replacement Machine and  
return it to Brother using the pre-paid freight bill  
supplied by Brother in accordance with the  
instructions provided by Brother. Since you will  
be in possession of two machines, Brother will  
require that you provide a valid major credit  
card number. Brother will issue a hold against  
the credit card account number that you  
provide until Brother receives your original  
Product and determines that your original  
Product is entitled to warranty coverage. Your  
credit card will be charged up to the cost of a  
new Product only if: (i) you do not return your  
original Product to Brother within five (5)  
business days; (ii) the problems with your  
original Product are not covered by the limited  
warranty; (iii) the proper packaging instructions  
are not followed and has caused damage to  
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL  
OTHER WARRANTIES, WRITTEN OR  
ORAL,  
WHETHER  
EXPRESSED  
BY  
AFFIRMATION, PROMISE, DESCRIPTION,  
DRAWING, MODEL OR SAMPLE. ANY AND  
ALL WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THIS  
ONE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY  
DISCLAIMED.  
This Limited Warranty is the only warranty  
that Brother is giving for this Product. It is  
the final expression and the exclusive and  
only statement of Brother's obligations to  
you. It replaces all other agreements and  
understandings that you may have with  
Brother or its representatives.  
This warranty gives you certain rights and  
you may also have other rights that may  
vary from state to state.  
This Limited Warranty (and Brother's  
obligation to you) may not be changed in  
any way unless you and Brother sign the  
same piece of paper in which we (1) refer  
to this Product and your bill of sale date, (2)  
describe the change to this warranty and  
(3) agree to make that change.  
Important: We recommend that you keep  
all original packing materials, in the event  
that you ship this Product.  
© 2008 Brother International Corporation  
v
BROTHER MULTIFUNCTION CENTER / FAX MACHINE  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
(Canada only)  
Pursuant to the limited warranty of 2 years from the date of purchase for labour and parts, Brother  
International Corporation (Canada) Ltd. (Brother), or its Authorized Service Centres, will repair  
or replace (at Brother's sole discretion) this MFC/Fax machine free of charge if defective in  
material or workmanship. This warranty applies only to products purchased and used in Canada.  
This limited Warranty does not include cleaning, consumables (including, without limitation, ink  
cartridges, print cartridges, print rolls, thermal paper rolls, toner cartridges, drum units, OPC  
belts, fixing units, print heads, paper feed rollers, transfer rolls, cleaning rollers, waste toner  
packs, oil bottles) or damage caused by accident, neglect, misuse or improper installation or  
operation, any damage caused from service, maintenance, modifications, or tampering by  
anyone other than a Brother Authorized Service Representative, or if shipped out of the country.  
The use of supplies or consumable items that are non-Brother products may void your warranty.  
This limited warranty ceases when this machine is rented, sold, or otherwise disposed of.  
Operation of the MFC/Fax machine in excess of the specifications or with the Serial Number or  
Rating Label removed shall be deemed abuse and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability  
of the end-user/purchaser.  
In order to obtain warranty service, the MFC/Fax machine must be delivered or shipped freight  
prepaid by the end-user/purchaser to a BrotherAuthorized Service Centre, together with your  
Canadian Proof of Purchase in the form of a Sales Receipt.  
When shipping or transporting your MFC/Fax machine, please refer to your Operation  
Manual for the proper packaging procedures.  
For Laser units: Failure to remove the Toner Cartridge (and Toner Drum Unit, waste toner  
packs or oil bottles on applicable models) during shipping or transport will cause severe  
damage to the Laser MFC/Fax machine and will void the Warranty.  
For inkjet units: (When shipping your Inkjet MFC/Fax machine remove the ink cartridges and replace them with  
the original protective parts. If original protective parts are not available, leave ink cartridges installed. Please  
avoid shipping the unit without original protective parts or ink cartridges.) Damage to your print head resulting from  
packing the Inkjet MFC/Fax machine without the ink cartridges or the protective parts will void your warranty.  
Improper packaging may cause severe damage to the machine during shipping and will void the warranty.  
BROTHER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
INCLUDING,  
WITHOUT  
LIMITATIONS,  
ANY  
IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES  
OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT TO THE  
EXTENT THAT ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW CANNOT BE VALIDLY WAIVED.  
No oral or written information, advice or representation provided by Brother, its Authorized  
Service Centres, Distributors, Dealers, Agents or employees, shall create another warranty  
or modify this warranty. The warranty states Brother's entire liability and your exclusive  
remedy against Brother for any failure of the MFC/Fax machine to operate properly.  
Neither Brother nor anyone else involved in the development, production, or delivery of this  
MFC/Fax machine shall be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, consequential, exemplary, or  
punitive damages, including lost profits, arising from the use of or inability to use the product, even  
if advised by the end user/purchaser of the possibility of such damages. Since some Provinces do  
not allow the above limitation of liability, such limitation, may not apply to you.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other  
rights which vary from Province to Province.  
Warranty Service is available at Brother Authorized  
Service Centres throughout Canada.  
For Technical Assistance or for the name and location  
of your nearest Authorized Service Centre call 1-877-BROTHER.  
Internet support: [email protected] or browse Brother's Web Site www.brother.ca.  
vi  
 
Table of Contents  
vii  
viii  
Receiving faxes into memory when the paper tray is empty  
ix  
x
®
USB Flash memory drive  
106  
xi  
xii  
Standard telephone and FCC Notices (These notices are in effect on  
models sold and used in the United States only.) ...................................139  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Declaration of Conformity (USA only)......................................................141  
xiii  
xiv  
General Information  
1
1
Using the  
documentation  
Accessing the  
Software User’s Guide  
and Network User’s  
Guide  
1
Thank you for buying a Brother machine!  
Reading the documentation will help you  
make the most of your machine.  
1
This User’s Guide does not contain all the  
information about the machine such as how  
to use the advanced features of the Printer,  
Scanner, PC Fax and Network. When you are  
ready to learn detailed information about  
these operations, read the Software User’s  
Guide and Network User’s Guide that are  
on the CD-ROM.  
Symbols and conventions  
used in the documentation  
1
The following symbols and conventions are  
used throughout the documentation.  
Bold  
Bold typeface identifiesspecific  
keys on the machine’s control  
panel.  
Viewing Documentation  
1
Italics  
Italicized typeface emphasizes  
an important point or refers you  
to a related topic.  
Viewing Documentation  
®
(For Windows )  
1
Courier Text in Courier New font  
To view the documentation, from the Start  
menu, point to Brother, MFC-XXXX (where  
XXXX is your model name) from the  
programs group, and then choose  
New  
identifies messages on the  
LCD of the machine.  
User’s Guides in HTML format.  
Warnings tell you what to do to  
prevent possible personal injury.  
If you have not installed the software, you can  
find the documentation by following the  
instructions below:  
Cautions specify procedures you  
must follow or avoid to prevent  
possible damage to the machine or  
other objects.  
a Turn on your PC. Insert the Brother  
CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to  
possible electrical shock.  
b If the model name screen appears, click  
your model name.  
Notes tell you how you should  
respond to a situation that may arise  
or give tips about how the operation  
works with other features.  
Improper Setup icons alert you to  
devices and operations that are not  
compatible with the machine.  
2
         
General Information  
c If the language screen appears, click  
your language. The CD-ROM main  
menu will appear.  
How to find Scanning instructions  
1
There are several ways you can scan  
documents. You can find the instructions as  
follows:  
1
Software User’s Guide  
®
Scanning (For Windows 2000  
®
Professional/Windows XP and  
®
Windows Vista )  
®
ControlCenter3 (For Windows 2000  
®
Professional/Windows XP and  
®
Windows Vista )  
Network Scanning  
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR  
How-to-Guides  
Note  
If this window does not appear, use  
®
The complete ScanSoft™ PaperPort™  
11SE with OCR How-to-Guides can be  
viewed from the Help selection in the  
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 11SE  
application.  
Windows Explorer to run the start.exe  
program from the root directory of the  
Brother CD-ROM.  
d Click Documentation.  
How to find Network setup  
instructions  
e Click the documentation you want to  
read.  
1
HTML documents: Software  
User’s Guide and Network User’s  
Guide in HTML format.  
Your machine can be connected to a wireless  
or wired network. You can find basic setup  
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your  
wireless access point supports  
SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™ or AOSS™, follow the steps in the  
Quick Setup Guide. For more information  
about network setup please see the Network  
User's Guide.  
This format is recommended for  
viewing on your computer.  
PDF documents: User’s Guide for  
stand-alone operations, Software  
User’s Guide and Network User’s  
Guide in PDF format.  
This format is recommended for  
printing the manuals. Click to go to  
the Brother Solutions Center, where  
you can view or download the PDF  
documents. (Internet access and  
PDF Reader software are required.)  
3
Chapter 1  
Viewing Documentation  
(For Macintosh )  
How to find Scanning instructions  
1
®
1
There are several ways you can scan  
documents. You can find the instructions as  
follows:  
®
a Turn on your Macintosh . Insert the  
Brother CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
Software User’s Guide  
drive. The following window will appear.  
®
Scanning (For Mac OS X 10.2.4 or  
greater)  
®
ControlCenter2 (For Mac OS X 10.2.4 or  
greater)  
®
Network Scanning (For Mac OS X 10.2.4  
or greater)  
®
®
Presto! PageManager User’s Guide  
®
®
The complete Presto! PageManager  
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help  
®
®
selection in the Presto! PageManager  
application.  
b Double-click the Documentation icon.  
c Double-click your language folder.  
How to find Network setup  
instructions  
1
Your machine can be connected to a wireless  
or wired network. You can find basic setup  
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your  
wireless access point supports  
d Double-click the top.html file to view the  
Software User's Guide and Network  
User's Guide in HTML format.  
SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™ or AOSS™, follow the steps in the  
Quick Setup Guide. For more information  
about network setup please see the Network  
User's Guide.  
e Click the documentation you want to  
read:  
Software User’s Guide  
Network User’s Guide  
4
General Information  
To visit our web site for original/genuine  
Brother Supplies  
Accessing Brother  
Support  
(For Windows )  
Supplies Information.  
1
®
1
To access the Brother CreativeCenter  
for FREE photo projects and printable  
downloads, click Brother CreativeCenter  
(
)
You can find all the contacts you will need,  
such as Web support (Brother Solutions  
Center), Customer Service and Brother  
Authorized Service Centers on Brother  
numbers on page i and on the Brother CD-  
ROM.  
.
To return to the main page, click Back or  
if you have finished, click Exit.  
Click Brother Support on the main menu.  
The following screen will appear:  
To access our web site  
(http://www.brother.com), click Brother  
Home Page.  
To view all Brother Numbers, including  
Customer Service numbers for the USA  
and Canada, click Support Information.  
To access the USA Brother online  
shopping mall  
additional product and services  
information, click Brother Mall.com.  
To access Canada’s Brother online  
shopping mall (http://www.brother.ca) for  
additional product and services  
information, click Shop Online (Canada).  
For the latest news and product support  
click Brother Solutions Center.  
5
 
Chapter 1  
Control panel overview  
1
10  
9
Me  
1
2
1
Fax and telephone keys  
3
Mode keys:  
Fax Preview  
Fax  
Lets you preview incoming and outgoing  
faxes on the LCD.  
Lets you access Fax mode.  
Scan  
Hook  
Lets you access Scan mode.  
Press before dialing if you want to make  
sure a fax machine will answer, and then  
press Black Start or Color Start.  
Copy  
Lets you access Copy mode.  
Also, press this key after picking up the  
handset of an external telephone during the  
F/T pseudo/double-ring.  
Photo Capture  
®
Lets you access PhotoCapture Center mode.  
4
Menu keys:  
Redial/Pause  
Volume keys  
Redials the last 30 numbers called. It also  
inserts a pause when programming quick  
dial numbers.  
d c  
While the machine is idle, you can press  
these keys to adjust the ring volume.  
2
Dial Pad  
Phone Book key  
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax  
numbers and as a keyboard for entering  
information into the machine.  
Press to store One Touch, Speed Dial and  
Group numbers in the machine’s memory.  
(Canada only) The # key lets you temporarily  
switch the dialing mode during a telephone call  
from Pulse to Tone.  
Lets you look up and dial numbers that are  
stored in the memory.  
6
       
General Information  
1
9
8
7
6
Mem.  
Fax  
12:45  
21.12..2009  
3
4
5
d or c  
6 On/Off  
Press to scroll backward or forward to a  
menu selection.  
You can turn the machine on or off.  
The On/Off key can be customized by  
changing the Power Off setting.  
Also, press to choose options.  
a or b  
Press to scroll through the menus and options.  
Menu  
Access the main menu.  
OK  
7
Stop/Exit  
Stops an operation or exits from a menu.  
8 Ink  
Lets you clean the print head, check the print  
quality, and check the available ink volume.  
Choose a setting.  
9 LCD (liquid crystal display)  
Clear/Back  
Displays messages on the screen to help you  
set up and use your machine.  
Press to cancel the current setting.  
5
Start keys:  
Also, you can adjust the angle of the LCD  
screen by lifting it.  
Color Start  
Lets you start sending faxes or making  
copies in full color. Also lets you start a  
scanning operation (in color or black &  
white, depending on the scanning setting in  
the ControlCenter software).  
10 One Touch keys  
These 3 keys give you instant access to 6  
previously stored numbers.  
Shift  
To access One Touch numbers 4 to 6, hold  
down Shift as you press the One Touch key.  
Black Start  
Lets you start sending faxes or making  
copies in black & white. Also lets you start  
a scanning operation (in color or black &  
white depending on the scanning setting in  
the ControlCenter software).  
7
 
Chapter 1  
LCD screen  
1
Basic Operations  
1
The LCD shows the current machine status  
when the machine is idle.  
The following steps show how to change a  
setting in the machine. In this example the  
Mode Timer setting is changed from  
2 minutes to 30 seconds.  
1
2
3
4
Mem.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Fax  
12:45  
21.12.2009  
c Press OK.  
5
d Press a or b to choose Mode Timer.  
1
Wireless Status  
e Press d or c to choose 30Secs.  
A four level indicator shows the current  
wireless signal strength if you are using a  
wireless connection.  
General Setup  
Mode Timer  
Tray Setting  
Volume  
30Secs  
Auto Daylight  
PwrOff Setting  
Off  
Fax Receive : Off  
0
Max  
MENU  
Select & Press  
OK  
Press OK.  
2
Memory Status  
Lets you see the available memory in the  
machine.  
f You can see the current setting on the  
LCD:  
3
4
Ink indicator  
General Setup  
Lets you see the available ink volume.  
Mode Timer  
Tray Setting  
Volume  
30Secs  
Current Receive Mode  
Lets you see the current receive mode.  
Fax(Fax only)  
Auto Daylight  
PwrOff Setting  
Off  
Fax Receive : Off  
F/T(Fax/Tel)  
MENU  
Select & Press  
OK  
TAD(External TAD)  
Mnl(Manual)  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
5
Faxes in memory  
Shows how many received faxes are in the  
memory.  
Note  
If you receive a fax containing multiple paper  
sizes (for example, a Letter size page and a  
Ledger size page), the machine creates and  
stores a file for each paper size. The LCD will  
show that more than one fax job has been  
received.  
8
   
Loading paper and documents  
2
2
Loading paper and  
other media  
Note  
• When you are using Legal, Ledger or A3  
size paper, press and hold the universal  
guide release button (1) as you slide out  
the front of the paper tray.  
2
2
Note  
• For Tray #2, see Loading paper in paper  
• If the tray used for Fax mode is set to  
Auto Selectyou should open and close  
the scanner cover to reset the machine  
after refilling paper tray#1.  
1
1
Loading paper in paper  
tray #1  
2
a If the paper support flap is open, close it,  
and then pull the paper tray completely  
out of the machine.  
If you are using A5 or smaller size paper,  
make sure that the paper tray is not extended.  
b Open the paper tray cover (1).  
1
9
     
Chapter 2  
c
With both hands, gently press and slide  
the paper side guides (1) and then the  
paper length guide (2) to fit the paper size.  
Make sure that the triangular marks (3)  
on the paper side guides (1) and paper  
length guide (2) line up with the mark for  
the paper size you are using.  
e Gently put the paper into the paper tray  
print side down and top edge in first.  
Check that the paper is flat in the tray.  
1
f Gently adjust the paper side guides to fit  
the paper with both hands.  
Make sure the paper side guides touch  
the sides of the paper.  
3
2
d Fan the stack of paper well to avoid  
paper jams and misfeeds.  
Note  
Be careful that you do not push the paper  
in too far; it may lift at the back of the tray  
and cause feed problems.  
Note  
Always make sure that the paper is not  
curled.  
10  
Loading paper and documents  
g Close the paper tray cover.  
Note  
When you shorten tray#1, take the paper  
out of tray. Then shorten the tray by  
pressing the universal guide release  
button (1) and put the paper into the tray.  
Adjust the paper length guide (2) to fit the  
paper size.  
2
h Slowly push the paper tray completely  
into the machine.  
1
1
Note  
DO NOT push Tray #1 into the machine  
too quickly. Doing this may cause injury to  
your hand by trapping it between Tray #1  
and Tray #2. Please push Tray #1 slowly.  
i While holding the paper tray in place,  
pull out the paper support (1) until it  
clicks and unfold the paper support  
flap (2).  
2
2
1
11  
Chapter 2  
c With both hands, gently press and slide  
the paper side guides (1) and then the  
paper length guide (2) to fit the paper  
size.  
Loading paper in paper  
tray #2  
2
Make sure that the triangular marks (3)  
on the paper side guides (1) and paper  
length guide (2) line up with the mark for  
the paper size you are using.  
Note  
You can only use plain paper sizes  
Ledger, Letter, Legal, Executive, A3 or A4  
in Tray #2.  
a Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
1
3
b Take off the paper tray cover (1).  
1
2
12  
   
Loading paper and documents  
f Gently adjust the paper side guides with  
both hands to fit the paper stack.  
Make sure the paper side guides touch  
the sides of the paper.  
Note  
If you are using Ledger, Legal or A3 size  
paper, press and hold the universal guide  
release button (1) as you slide out the  
front of the paper tray.  
2
1
Note  
Be careful that you do not push the paper  
in too far; it may lift at the back of the tray  
and cause feed problems.  
d Fan the stack of paper well to avoid  
g Put on the paper tray cover.  
paper jams and misfeeds.  
Note  
Always make sure that the paper is not  
curled.  
e Gently put the paper into the paper tray  
print side down and top edge in first.  
Check that the paper is flat in the tray  
and below the maximum paper  
mark (1).  
h Push the paper tray firmly back into the  
machine.  
1
13  
Chapter 2  
i Do one of the following:  
l Close the output paper tay cover and  
push the paper tray into the machine.  
Pull out the paper support (1) until it  
clicks and unfold the paper support  
flap (2).  
If you are using Ledger, Legal or A3  
size paper, go to step j.  
If you are using Letter size paper, go  
to step l.  
j Pull tray #1 out of the machine.  
Press and hold the universal guide  
release button (1) as you slide out the  
front of the paper tray.  
2
1
Note  
If you are finished using Ledger, Legal or  
A3 size paper and want to use a smaller  
paper size, take the paper out of the tray.  
Then shorten the tray by pressing the  
universal guide release button (1) and put  
the smaller paper into the tray and adjust  
the paper length guide (2) to fit the paper  
size you are going to use.  
1
1
1
k Open the paper tray cover and adjust  
the paper length guide (1) for the paper.  
2
1
14  
   
Loading paper and documents  
How to load envelopes and post cards  
2
Loading envelopes and  
post cards  
2
a Before loading, press the corners and  
sides of envelopes or post cards to  
make them as flat as possible.  
About envelopes  
2
2
Note  
Use envelopes that weigh from 20 to 25 lb  
If envelopes or post cards are ‘double-  
feeding’, put one envelope or post card in  
the paper tray at a time.  
2
(80 to 95 g/m ).  
Some envelopes need margin settings to  
be set in the application. Make sure you  
do a test print first.  
CAUTION  
DO NOT use any of the following types of  
envelopes, as they will cause paper feed  
problems:  
• That are of a baggy construction.  
• That are embossed (have raised writing  
on them).  
• That have clasps or staples.  
• That are pre-printed on the inside.  
Glue  
Double flap  
b
Put envelopes or post cards in the paper  
tray with the address side down and the  
leading edge in first as shown in the  
illustration. With both hands, gently press  
and slide the paper side guides (1) and  
paper length guide (2) to fit the size of the  
envelopes or post cards.  
Occasionally you may experience paper  
feed problems caused by the thickness,  
size and flap shape of the envelopes you  
are using.  
1
2
15  
   
Chapter 2  
If you have problems when printing on  
envelopes, try the following suggestions:  
2
a Open the envelope flap.  
b Make sure the open flap is either to the  
side of the envelope or to the back edge  
of the envelope when printing.  
c Adjust the size and margin in your  
application.  
Removing small printouts  
from the machine  
2
When the machine ejects small paper onto  
the output paper tray you may not be able to  
reach it. Make sure printing has finished, and  
then pull the tray completely out of the  
machine.  
16  
 
Loading paper and documents  
Printable area  
2
The printable area depends on the settings in the application you are using. The figures below  
show the unprintable areas on cut sheet paper and envelopes. The machine can only print in the  
shaded areas when the Borderless print feature is available and turned on.  
2
Cut Sheet Paper  
Envelopes  
3
4
3
1
4
1
2
2
Top (1)  
Bottom (2)  
Left (3)  
Right (4)  
Cut Sheet  
Envelopes  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.47 in. (12 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.95 in. (24 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
Note  
The Borderless feature is not available for envelopes.  
17  
 
Chapter 2  
Recommended media  
2
Acceptable paper and  
other media  
2
To get the best print quality, we suggest using  
Brother paper. (See table below.)  
The print quality can be affected by the type  
of paper you are using in the machine.  
We recommend using ‘3M Transparency  
Film’ when you print on transparencies.  
To get the best print quality for the settings  
you have chosen, always set the Paper Type  
to match the type of paper you load.  
Brother paper  
Paper Type  
Item  
You can use plain paper, inkjet paper (coated  
paper), glossy paper, transparencies and  
envelopes.  
Ledger Plain  
BP60PLGR (USA  
only)  
Ledger Glossy Photo  
Letter Plain  
BP71GLGR  
We recommend testing various paper types  
before buying large quantities.  
BP60PL (USA only)  
BP71GLTR  
Letter Glossy Photo  
Letter Inkjet (Matte)  
4 × 6 in. Glossy Photo  
For best results, use Brother paper.  
BP60ML (USA only)  
BP71GP  
When you print on inkjet paper (coated  
paper), transparencies and photo paper,  
be sure to choose the proper media in the  
Basic’ tab of the printer driver or in the  
Paper Type setting of the machine’s  
When you print on Brother Photo paper,  
load one extra sheet of the same photo  
paper in the paper tray. An extra sheet has  
been included in the paper package for  
this purpose.  
When you use transparencies or photo  
paper, remove each sheet at once to  
prevent smudging or paper jams.  
Avoid touching the printed surface of the  
paper immediately after printing; the  
surface may not be completely dry and  
may stain your fingers.  
18  
     
Loading paper and documents  
Paper capacity of the output paper  
tray  
Handling and using media  
2
2
Store paper in its original packaging, and  
keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and  
away from moisture, direct sunlight and  
heat.  
2
Up to 50 sheets of Letter or A4 20 lb (80 g/m )  
paper.  
2
Transparencies or photo paper must be  
picked up from the output paper tray one  
page at a time to avoid smudging.  
The coated side of photo paper is shiny.  
Avoid touching the shiny (coated) side.  
Load photo paper with the shiny side  
facing down.  
Avoid touching either side of  
transparencies because they absorb  
water and perspiration easily, and this  
may cause decreased output quality.  
Transparencies designed for laser  
printers/copiers may stain your next  
document. Use only transparencies  
recommended for inkjet printing.  
You can only print on both sides of the  
paper with PC printing. See Printing for  
®
Windows in the Software User’s Guide  
on the CD-ROM.  
Improper Setup  
DO NOT use the following kinds of paper:  
• Damaged, curled, wrinkled, or  
irregularly shaped paper  
1
1
1
0.08 in. (2 mm) or greater  
• Extremely shiny or highly textured paper  
• Paper that cannot be arranged uniformly  
when stacked  
19  
   
Chapter 2  
Choosing the right media  
2
Paper type and size for each operation  
2
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
Usage  
Fax  
Copy  
Photo  
Printer  
Capture  
Cut Sheet  
Ledger  
A3  
11 × 17 in. (279.4 × 431.8 mm)  
11.7 × 16.5 in. (297 × 420 mm)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Letter  
A4  
8 1/2 × 11 in. (215.9 × 279.4 mm) Yes  
8.3 × 11.7 in. (210 × 297 mm) Yes  
8 1/2 × 14 in. (215.9 × 355.6 mm) Yes  
Legal  
Executive 7 1/4 × 10 1/2 in. (184 × 267 mm) –  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
A5  
10.1 × 14.3 in. (257 × 364 mm)  
7.2 × 10.1 in. (182 × 257 mm)  
5.8 × 8.3 in. (148 × 210 mm)  
4.1 × 5.8 in. (105 × 148 mm)  
4 × 6 in. (10 × 15 cm)  
Yes  
A6  
Cards  
Photo  
Photo L  
Photo 2L  
Yes  
Yes  
3 1/2 × 5 in. (89 × 127 mm)  
5 × 7 in. (13 × 18 cm)  
Yes  
Index Card 5 × 8 in. (127 × 203 mm)  
Post Card 1 3.9 × 5.8 in. (100 × 148 mm)  
PostCard2 5.8 × 7.9 in. (148 × 200 mm)  
(Double)  
Envelopes  
C5 Envelope 6.4 × 9 in. (162 × 229 mm)  
DL Envelope 4.3 × 8.7 in. (110 × 220 mm)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
COM-10  
Monarch  
4 1/8 × 9 1/2 in. (105 × 241 mm)  
3 7/8 × 7 1/2 in. (98 × 191 mm)  
JE4 Envelope 4.1 × 9.3 in. (105 × 235 mm)  
Transparencies Letter  
A4  
8 1/2 × 11 in. (215.9 × 279.4 mm) –  
Yes  
Yes  
8.3 × 11.7 in. (210 × 297 mm)  
20  
       
Loading paper and documents  
Paper weight, thickness and capacity  
2
Paper Type  
Weight  
Thickness  
No. of  
sheets  
17 to 32 lb (64 to 120 g/m2)  
17 to 32 lb (64 to 105 g/m2)  
Cut  
Sheet  
Plain Paper  
3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm)  
3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm)  
150  
2
(Tray #2)  
Plain Paper  
250  
17 to 53 lb (64 to 200 g/m2)  
Up to 58 lb (Up to 220 g/m2)  
Up to 58 lb (Up to 220 g/m2)  
Up to 32 lb (Up to 120 g/m2)  
Up to 53 lb (Up to 200 g/m2)  
Inkjet Paper  
3 to 10 mil (0.08 to 0.25 mm)  
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)  
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)  
Up to 6 mil (Up to 0.15 mm)  
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.23 mm)  
Up to 20mil (Up to 0.52 mm)  
20  
20  
20  
30  
30  
10  
10  
Glossy Paper  
Cards Photo 4"×6"  
Index Card  
Post Card  
20 to 25 lb (75 to 95 g/m2)  
Envelopes  
Transparencies  
21  
   
Chapter 2  
a Unfold the ADF Document Support (1)  
and the ADF Document Output Support  
Flap (2).  
Loading documents  
2
You can send a fax, make copies, and scan  
from the ADF (automatic document feeder)  
and from the scanner glass.  
1
2
Using the ADF  
2
The ADF can hold up to 50 pages and feeds  
each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb  
2
(80 g/m ) paper and always fan the pages  
before putting them in the ADF.  
Recommended environment  
2
2
2
Temperature:  
Humidity:  
Paper:  
68 to 86° F (20 to 30° C)  
b Fan the pages well.  
50% to 70%  
c Place your document, face up, top  
edge first in the ADF until the LCD  
display shows ADF Readyand you feel  
it touch the feed roller.  
20 lb (80 g/m2)  
Document Sizes Supported  
Length:  
Width:  
5.8 to 17 in. (148 to 431.8 mm)  
Note  
5.8 to 11.7 in. (148 to 297 mm)  
17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m2)  
Insert A4/Letter documents short-edge  
first.  
Weight:  
How to load documents  
CAUTION  
DO NOT pull on the document while it is  
feeding.  
DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled,  
folded, ripped, stapled, paper clipped,  
pasted or taped.  
DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or fabric.  
Make sure documents written with ink are  
completely dry.  
22  
   
Loading paper and documents  
d Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the  
How to load documents  
2
width of your document.  
Note  
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must  
be empty.  
2
1
a Lift the document cover.  
b Using the document guidelines on the  
left and top, place the document in the  
upper left hand corner, with the  
document face down on the scanner  
glass.  
CAUTION  
DO NOT leave a thick document on the  
scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may  
jam.  
Using the scanner glass  
2
You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or  
scan pages of a book or one page at a time.  
Document Sizes Supported  
2
Length:  
Width:  
Up to 17 in. (431.8 mm)  
Up to 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Up to 4.4 lb (2 kg)  
Weight:  
c Close the document cover.  
CAUTION  
If you are scanning a book or thick  
document, DO NOT slam the cover down or  
press on it.  
23  
   
Chapter 2  
Scannable area  
2
The scannable area depends on the settings  
in the application you are using. The figures  
below show the areas you cannot scan on  
paper.  
3
4
1
2
Usage Document  
Size  
Top (1)  
Bottom (2) Right (4)  
Left (3)  
Fax  
Ledger  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.15 in.  
(3.7 mm)  
A3  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.18 in.  
(4.5 mm)  
Letter  
A4  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.16 in.  
(4 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
(Scanner  
Glass)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
(ADF)  
0.04 in.  
(1 mm)  
Legal  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.16 in.  
(4 mm)  
Copy  
Scan  
Any size of  
paper  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
Any size of  
paper  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
24  
 
General setup  
3
3
On/Off key  
3
Power Off setting  
3
You can turn the machine on and off by  
pressing the On/Off key.  
You can customize the machine's On/Off  
key. The factory setting is  
Fax Receive:Off. Your machine will not  
work when it is switched off, but it will clean  
the print head periodically. If you turn this  
setting to Fax Receive:On, you can  
receive faxes or calls even when the machine  
3
Note  
• If you press the On/Off key while the  
machine is in use it will finish the operation  
before going into the Off mode.  
is switched off. (See On/Off key on this page.)  
• If you have connected an external  
telephone or TAD, it is always available.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
Turning the machine off  
3
a Press and hold down the On/Off key  
until the LCD shows Shutting Down.  
The LCD will stay on for a few seconds  
before going off.  
c Press a or b to choose  
PwrOff Setting.  
d Press d or c to choose  
Fax Receive:On(or  
Fax Receive:Off).  
Press OK.  
Turning the machine on  
3
a Press the On/Off key.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
25  
           
Chapter 3  
Mode Timer  
3
On/Off  
setting  
Receive  
mode  
Available  
operations  
The machine has four temporary mode keys  
on the control panel: Fax, Scan, Copy and  
Photo Capture. You can change the amount  
of time the machine takes after the last Scan,  
Copy or PhotoCapture operation before it  
returns to Fax mode. If you choose Off, the  
machine stays in the mode you used last.  
Fax Receive:  
Off  
No machine  
operations will be  
available.  
(factory  
setting)  
Fax Receive: Fax Only  
Fax Receive  
Easy Receive  
Delayed Fax 3  
Fax Forward 3  
Paging 3  
On  
External  
TAD  
Fax Storage 3  
Fax Preview 3  
PC Fax Receive 3  
Remote Retrieval 3  
Manual  
Easy Receive  
Delayed Fax 3  
Fax/Tel2  
a Press Menu.  
1
2
3
You cannot receive a fax with Black Start or  
Color Start.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
You cannot receive a fax automatically if you have  
set the receive mode to Fax/Tel.  
Set before you switch off the machine.  
c Press a or b to choose Mode Timer.  
d Press d or c to choose 0Sec, 30Secs,  
1Min, 2Mins, 5Minsor Off.  
Press OK.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
26  
       
General setup  
Paper settings  
3
Note  
• You can only use plain paper sizes  
Ledger, Letter, Legal, A3 or A4 in Tray #2.  
Paper Size and Type  
3
• The machine ejects paper with printed  
surfaces face up onto the paper tray in  
front of the machine. When you use  
transparencies or glossy paper, remove  
each sheet at once to prevent smudging  
or paper jams.  
To get the best print quality, set the machine  
for the type of paper you are using.  
You can use seven sizes of paper for printing  
and copying: Ledger, Letter, Legal, A3, A4,  
A5 and 4 × 6 in. (10 × 15 cm) and five sizes  
for printing faxes: Ledger, Letter, Legal, A3 or  
A4. When you load a different size of paper in  
the machine, you will need to change the  
paper size setting at the same time so your  
3
Tray use in Copy mode  
3
You can change the default tray the machine  
will use for printing copies.  
machine can fit an incoming fax on the page.  
a Press Menu.  
To change the default setting follow the  
instructions below:  
b Press a or b to chose General Setup.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu.  
c Press a or b to chose Tray Setting.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Tray#1or  
Tray#2.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Tray Setting.  
Press OK.  
e Do one of the following:  
d Press a or b to choose  
Tray Use:Copy.  
If you chose Tray#1, press d or c to  
choose Plain Paper,  
e Press d or c to choose Tray#1or  
Inkjet Paper, Brother BP71,  
Other Glossy or  
Transparency.  
Tray#2.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Press OK.  
Press a or b to choose Paper Size  
and press d or c to choose Letter,  
Legal, Ledger, A4, A5, A3or  
4"x6".  
Note  
You can change the paper size and tray  
selection temporarily for the next copy.  
Press OK.  
If you chose Tray#2, press a or b to  
choose Paper Sizeand press  
d or c to choose Letter, Legal,  
Ledger, A4or A3.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
27  
     
Chapter 3  
Tray use in Fax mode  
3
Secure Paper Feed mode for  
Ledger size Short Grain Paper  
3
You can change the default tray the machine  
will use for printing received faxes.  
If your printed pages have smudge problems  
when using Ledger paper, your paper may be  
short grain paper. Choose  
LGR - Short Grainand set it to Onto  
avoid this problem.  
Auto Selectwill allow your machine to  
take paper from Tray #1 first, or from Tray #2  
if:  
Tray #1 is out of paper.  
a Press Menu.  
Tray #2 is set to a different paper size that  
is more suitable for the received faxes.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
Both trays are using the same size paper  
and Tray #1 is not set to use plain paper.  
a Press Menu.  
c Press a or b to choose  
LGR - Short Grain.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
d Press d or c to choose On.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Tray Setting.  
Press OK.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
d Press a or b to choose Tray Use:Fax.  
• If you are not sure about the type of paper  
you are using, consult the paper  
packaging or paper manufacturer for  
paper specifications.  
e Press d or c to choose Tray#1,  
Tray#2or Auto Select.  
Press OK.  
• Printing will be slower when using the  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
LGR - Short Grainsetting.  
28  
   
General setup  
Beeper Volume  
3
Volume Settings  
3
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep  
when you press a key, make a mistake or  
after you send or receive a fax.  
Ring Volume  
3
You can choose a range of ring volume  
levels, from Highto Off.  
You can choose a range of volume levels,  
from Highto Off.  
While the machine is idle, press d or c  
to adjust the volume level. The LCD shows  
the current setting, and each key press will  
change the volume to the next level. The  
machine will keep the new setting until you  
change it.You can also change the volume  
through the menu, by following the  
3
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Volume.  
Press OK.  
instructions below:  
Setting the Ring Volume from the  
menu  
d Press a or b to choose Beeper.  
3
e Press d or c to choose Low, Med, High  
or Off.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
c Press a or b to choose Volume.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Ring.  
e Press d or c to choose Low, Med, High  
or Off.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
29  
     
Chapter 3  
Speaker Volume  
3
Automatic Daylight  
Savings Time  
3
You can choose a range of speaker volume  
levels, from Highto Off.  
You can set the machine to change  
automatically for daylight savings time. It will  
reset itself forward one hour in the Spring and  
backward one hour in the Fall. Make sure you  
have set the correct date and time in the  
Date&Timesetting.  
Press Menu.  
a
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
The factory setting is Off, so you will have to  
turn on Automatic Daylight Saving Time as  
follows.  
c Press a or b to choose Volume.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Speaker.  
a Press Menu.  
e Press d or c to choose Low, Med, High  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
or Off.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
You can also adjust the speaker volume by  
c Press a or b to choose  
Auto Daylight.  
pressing Hook.  
d Press d or c to choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
a Press Hook.  
b Press a and d or c  
.
e Press Stop/Exit.  
This setting will stay until you change it  
again.  
c Press Hook.  
30  
   
General setup  
Sleep Mode  
3
LCD screen  
3
You can choose how long the machine must  
be idle (from 1 to 60 minutes) before it goes  
into sleep mode. The timer will restart if any  
operation is carried out on the machine. The  
default setting is 10 minutes.  
LCD Contrast  
3
You can adjust the LCD contrast for a sharper  
and more vivid display. If you are having  
difficulty reading the LCD, try changing the  
contrast setting.  
3
a Press Menu.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Sleep Mode.  
c Press a or b to choose LCD Settings.  
Press OK.  
d Press d or c to choose 1Min, 2Mins,  
3Mins, 5Mins, 10Mins, 30Minsor  
60Mins, which is the length of time the  
machine is idle before entering sleep  
mode.  
d Press a or b to choose LCD Contrast.  
e Press d or c to choose Light, Medor  
Press OK.  
Dark.  
Press OK.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Setting the backlight  
brightness  
3
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD  
backlight. If you are having difficulty reading  
the LCD, try changing the brightness setting.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose LCD Settings.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Backlight.  
e Press d or c to choose Light, Medor  
Dark.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
31  
         
Chapter 3  
Setting the Dim Timer for the  
backlight  
3
You can set how long the LCD backlight stays  
on after the last key press.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose LCD Settings.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Dim Timer.  
e Press d or c to choose 10Secs,  
20Secs, 30Secsor Off.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Setting the Wallpaper  
3
You can change the wallpaper.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose LCD Settings.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Wallpaper.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose your wallpaper  
from the four available designs.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
32  
   
Security features  
4
4
Setting and changing the  
Administrator Password  
Secure Function Lock  
4
4
Secure Function Lock lets you restrict public  
access to certain machine functions (Fax,  
Setting the password  
4
Copy, Scan, Print and PCC).  
This feature also prevents users from  
changing the default settings of the machine  
by limiting access to the menu settings.  
The password you set in these steps is for the  
administrator. This password is used to set  
up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on  
4
Before using the security features you must  
first enter an administrator password.  
Access to restricted operations can be  
enabled by creating a restricted user.  
Restricted users must enter a user password  
to use the machine.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
Make a careful note of your password. If you  
forget it, please call Brother Customer  
Service.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Function Lock.  
Press OK.  
1
Print includes PC-Fax Send as well as all print jobs.  
Note  
d Enter a four-digit number for the  
password using numbers 0-9.  
Press OK.  
• Only administrators can set limitations  
and make changes for each user.  
• When Print is disabled, PC print jobs will  
be lost without notification.  
e Re-enter the password when the LCD  
shows Verify:.  
• If Fax Tx is disabled, you cannot use any  
function in the Fax menu.  
Press OK.  
• Polling Receive is enabled only when both  
Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
33  
         
Chapter 4  
f Press a or b to choose Public.  
Press OK.  
Changing the password  
4
a Press Menu.  
g Do one of the following:  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
To set up the Public user, press  
d or c to choose Enableor  
Disablefor Fax Tx. After you  
have set Fax Tx, press a or b to  
choose the settings for Fax Rx,  
Copy(Color), Copy(B&W), Scan,  
Printand PCCby repeating this  
step.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Function Lock.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Set Password.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
To change the Public user settings,  
press a or b to choose the setting  
you want to change.  
e Enter the registered four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
f Enter a four-digit number for the new  
Press d or c to choose Enableor  
Disable.  
password.  
Press OK.  
Repeat this step until you finish  
changing settings.  
g When the LCD shows Verify:,  
re-enter the new password.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
Note  
You can set PC Print and PhotoCapture  
Print for only the Public user. If you disable  
PC Print and PhotoCapture Print for the  
Public user it will also disable PC Print and  
PhotoCapture Print for all restricted users.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
Setting up and changing the  
Public user  
4
You can set up the Public user. Public users  
do not need to enter a password. You can set  
up one Public user.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Function Lock.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Setup User.  
Press OK.  
e Enter the administrator password.  
Press OK.  
34  
 
Security features  
Changing user name, password or  
settings for restricted users  
Setting up and changing  
restricted users  
4
4
a Press Menu.  
Setting up restricted users  
4
b
c
Press  
Press OK.  
a
or  
b
to choose General Setup  
.
.
You can set up users with restrictions and a  
password. You can set up to 20 individual users  
with restrictions and a password.  
Press or  
Press OK.  
a
b
to choose Function Lock  
a Press Menu.  
d Press a or b to choose Setup User.  
Press OK.  
4
b
c
Press  
Press OK.  
a
or  
b
to choose General Setup  
.
.
e Enter the administrator password.  
Press OK.  
Press or  
Press OK.  
a
b
to choose Function Lock  
f Press a or b to choose the existing  
restricted user you want to change.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Setup User.  
Press OK.  
e Enter the administrator password.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose Change.  
Press OK.  
f Press a or b to choose User01.  
Press OK.  
h Do one of the following:  
If you want to change the name  
press Clear/Back, and then enter  
the new name. (See Entering Text  
g Use the numeric keys to enter the user  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
h Enter a four-digit password for the user.  
Press OK.  
To leave the name unchanged  
press OK.  
i Press d or c to choose Enableor  
Disablefor Fax Tx.  
i Enter a new four-digit password for this  
Press OK.  
user.  
After you have set Fax Tx, press a or b  
and repeat this step for Fax Rx,  
Copy(Color), Copy(B&W)and Scan.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
j Press d or c to choose Enableor  
Disablefor Fax Tx.  
Press OK.  
j Press a or b to choose Exit.  
Press OK.  
After you have set Fax Tx, press a or b  
and repeat this step for Fax Rx,  
Copy(Color), Copy(B&W)and Scan.  
Press OK.  
k Repeat f to j for entering each  
additional user and password.  
k Press a or b to choose Exit.  
Press OK.  
l Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
l Repeat f to k if you want to change  
more users and settings.  
You cannot use the same password as  
another user’s password.  
m Press Stop/Exit.  
35  
             
Chapter 4  
Reset existing restricted users  
4
Turning Secure Function  
Lock on/off  
You can reset restricted users one at a time.  
4
a Press Menu.  
Note  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
If you enter the wrong password, the LCD  
will show Wrong Password. Re-enter  
the correct password.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Function Lock.  
Press OK.  
Turning Secure Function Lock on  
4
a Press Menu.  
d Press a or b to choose Setup User.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
e Enter the administrator password.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Function Lock.  
Press OK.  
f Press a or b to choose the existing  
restricted user you want to reset.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Lock OffiOn.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose Reset.  
Press OK.  
e Enter your four-digit administrator  
h Press 1 to choose Yes.  
i Do one of the following:  
password.  
Press OK.  
Set new restricted user. (See Setting  
Turning Secure Function Lock off  
4
a Press Menu.  
If you do not want to set new  
restricted user, please go to step j.  
b Press a or b to choose Lock OniOff.  
Press OK.  
j Repeat f to i if you want to reset more  
users.  
c Enter your four-digit administrator  
password.  
Press OK.  
k Press Stop/Exit.  
36  
         
Security features  
Switching users  
4
Reset all users  
4
This setting allows a restricted user to log on  
the machine when Secure Function Lock is  
turned on.  
You can reset all settings and passwords for  
the Public user and all restricted users.  
Press Menu.  
a
a Hold down Shift as you press l.  
Or, press Menu. Then press a or b to  
choose Change Userand press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
General Setup.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose your user name  
and press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Function Lock.  
Press OK.  
4
c Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Reset All Users. Press OK.  
Changing to the Public mode  
4
e Enter your four-digit administrator  
password.  
a Press Menu.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Go to Public.  
Press OK.  
f Press 1 to reset.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
After a restricted user has finished using  
the machine, it will return to the Public  
setting within the same time as the Mode  
Timer setting. (See Mode Timer  
37  
     
Chapter 4  
38  
Sending a Fax  
5
5
Faxing from the ADF  
5
Entering Fax mode  
5
When the machine is idle, the time appears  
on the LCD. When you want to send a fax, or  
change fax send or receive settings, press  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Place the document face up in the ADF.  
the  
(Fax) key to illuminate it in blue.  
c Enter the fax number using the dial pad,  
One Touch or Speed Dial or Search.  
(For details, see How to Dial  
Note  
You can preview a fax message before  
sending it by pressing Fax Preview.  
For details, see How to preview an  
The LCD shows:  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Contrast  
Auto  
Glass ScanSize  
Phone Book  
Letter  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
The machine starts scanning the  
document.  
FAX  
Fax Press Start  
Press a or b to scroll through the Fax key  
options. Some functions are only available  
when sending black & white faxes.  
Note  
• To cancel, press Stop/Exit.  
Fax Resolution(See page 45.)  
Contrast(See page 45.)  
• If you send a black & white fax while the  
memory is full it will be sent in real time.  
• You can send a color fax that is Letter size  
or a black & white fax that is Ledger size.  
Glass ScanSize(See page 41.)  
Phone Book(See page 79.)  
Outgoing Call(See page 80.)  
Caller ID hist.(See page 81.)  
Broadcasting(See page 43.)  
Delayed Fax(See page 46.)  
Batch TX(See page 47.)  
Real Time TX(See page 46.)  
Polled TX(See page 92.)  
Polling RX(See page 91.)  
Overseas Mode(See page 46.)  
Set New Default(See page 47.)  
Factory Reset(See page 47.)  
When the option you want is highlighted,  
press OK.  
40  
     
Sending a Fax  
e Do one of the following:  
Faxing from the scanner glass  
5
To send a single page, press 2 to  
choose No(or press Black Start  
again).  
You can use the scanner glass to fax pages  
of a book one at a time. The document can be  
up to Ledger size.  
The machine starts sending the  
document.  
You cannot send color faxes with multiple  
pages.  
To send more than one page, press  
to choose Yesand go to step  
1
.
Note  
• Since you can only scan one page at a  
time, it is easier to use the ADF if you are  
sending a multiple page document.  
f Place the next page on the scanner  
glass.  
Press OK.  
The machine starts scanning the page.  
(Repeat steps e and f for each  
additional page.)  
• You can send a color fax that is Letter size  
or a black & white fax that is Ledger size.  
5
a Press  
(Fax).  
Glass Scan Size  
5
b Load your document face down on the  
scanner glass. (See Using the scanner  
To fax a Legal, Ledger, A3 or A4 size  
document from the scanner glass, you need  
to change the Glass ScanSizesetting.  
The default setting is Letter.  
c Enter the fax number using the dial pad,  
One Touch, Speed Dial or Search.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
Note  
You can preview a fax message before  
sending it by pressing Fax Preview. (See  
b Press a or b to choose  
Glass ScanSize.  
c Press d or c to choose Letter, Legal,  
Ledger, A4or A3.  
Press OK.  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
If you press Black Start, the  
machine starts scanning the first  
page. Go to step e.  
Note  
You can save the setting you use most  
often by setting it as the default. (See  
If you press Color Start, the  
machine starts sending the  
document.  
41  
         
Chapter 5  
e Press Black Start.  
Color fax transmission  
5
Note  
Your machine can send a color fax to  
machines that support this feature.  
The fax message in the memory will be  
sent and then erased when you press  
Black Start.  
Color faxes cannot be stored in the memory.  
When you send a color fax, the machine will  
send it in real time (even if Real Time TXis  
set to Off).  
Canceling a fax in progress  
5
If you want to cancel a fax while the machine  
is scanning, dialing or sending, press  
Stop/Exit.  
How to preview an outgoing  
fax  
5
You can preview a fax message before you  
send it. You must set the Real Time  
Transmission and Polling RX to Off before  
you use this feature.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Load the document.  
c Enter the fax number using the dial pad,  
One Touch or Speed Dial.  
d Press Fax Preview.  
The machine starts scanning the  
document and the outgoing fax appears  
on the LCD. When the fax is open the  
control panel keys will perform the  
operations shown below.  
Key  
Description  
Enlarge the fax.  
Reduce the fax.  
a or b  
d or c  
Scroll vertically.  
Scroll horizontally.  
Rotate the fax clockwise.  
Go back to the previous page.  
Go to the next page.  
Note  
If you preview a color fax before it is sent,  
you will only be able to send it in black &  
white. To send a color fax do not press the  
Fax Preview key.  
42  
       
Sending a Fax  
Broadcasting  
(Black & White only)  
Note  
If you have not used up any of the numbers  
for Groups, you can broadcast up to 256  
different numbers.  
5
Broadcasting is when the same fax message  
is automatically sent to more than one fax  
number. You can include Groups, One Touch,  
Speed Dial numbers and up to 50 manually  
dialed numbers in the same broadcast.  
The available memory will vary depending  
on the types of jobs in the memory and the  
number of locations used for broadcasting.  
If you broadcast to the maximum numbers  
available, you will not be able to use dual  
access and delayed fax.  
After the broadcast is finished, a Broadcast  
Report will be printed.  
• If the memory is full, press Stop/Exit to  
stop the job. If more than one page has  
been scanned, press Black Start to send  
the portion that is in the memory.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
5
b Load your document.  
c Press a or b to choose Broadcasting.  
Press OK.  
d You can add numbers to the broadcast  
in the following ways:  
Press a or b to choose Add Number  
and enter the number using a dial  
pad.  
Press OK.  
Press a or b to choose Phone Book  
and OK. Press a or b to choose  
Alphabetical Orderor  
Numerical Orderand OK. Press  
a or b to select a number and OK.  
Note  
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.  
Speed Dial locations begin with #.  
e After you have entered all the fax  
numbers by repeating step d, press  
a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
f Press Black Start.  
43  
     
Chapter 5  
Canceling a Broadcast in  
progress  
Additional sending  
operations  
5
5
a Press Menu.  
Sending faxes using multiple  
settings  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
5
c Press a or b to choose  
Remaining Jobs.  
When you send a fax you can choose any  
combination of these settings: resolution,  
contrast, overseas mode, delayed fax timer,  
polling transmission and real time  
transmission.  
Press OK.  
The LCD will show the fax number being  
dialed and the Broadcast job number.  
d Press OK.  
The LCD will ask you the following  
message:  
a Press  
(Fax).  
The LCD shows:  
Cancel Job?  
Yes i Press 1  
No  
i Press 2  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Contrast  
Auto  
Glass ScanSize  
Phone Book  
Letter  
e
Press  
1
to cancel the number being dialed.  
The LCD will then show the Broadcast  
job number.  
FAX  
Fax Press Start  
f Press OK.  
The LCD will ask you the following  
b Press a or b to choose a setting you  
want to change.  
message:  
Cancel Job?  
Yes i Press 1  
c Press d or c to choose an option.  
Press OK.  
No  
i Press 2  
d Repeat steps b to c to change more  
g Press 1 to cancel the Broadcast.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
settings.  
Note  
• Most settings are temporary and the  
machine returns to its default settings after  
you send a fax.  
• You can save some of the settings you  
use most often by setting them as default.  
These settings will stay until you change  
44  
         
Sending a Fax  
Contrast  
5
Changing fax resolution  
5
If your document is very light or very dark, you  
may want to change the contrast. For most  
documents the factory setting Autocan be  
used. It automatically chooses the suitable  
contrast for your document.  
The quality of a fax can be improved by  
changing the fax resolution.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
Use Lightwhen sending a light document.  
Use Darkwhen sending a dark document.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Fax Resolution.  
c Press d or c to choose the resolution  
a Press  
(Fax).  
you want.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Contrast.  
5
c Press d or c to choose Auto, Lightor  
Note  
Dark.  
You can choose four different resolution  
settings for black & white faxes and two for  
color.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Even if you choose Lightor Dark, the  
machine will send the fax using the Auto  
setting in any of the following conditions:  
Black & White  
Standard  
Suitable for most typed  
documents.  
• When you send a color fax.  
Fine  
Good for small print and  
transmits a little slower than  
Standard resolution.  
• When you choose Photoas the Fax  
Resolution.  
S.Fine  
Photo  
Good for small print or artwork  
and transmits slower than Fine  
resolution.  
Use when the document has  
varying shades of gray or is a  
photograph. This has the  
slowest transmission.  
Color  
Standard  
Suitable for most typed  
documents.  
Fine  
Use when the document is a  
photograph. The transmission  
time is slower than Standard  
resolution.  
If you choose S.Fineor Photoand then  
use the Color Start key to send a fax, the  
machine will send the fax using the Fine  
setting.  
45  
       
Chapter 5  
Dual access  
Overseas Mode  
5
(Black & White only)  
5
If you are having difficulty sending a fax  
overseas due to possible interference on the  
telephone line, we recommend that you turn  
on the Overseas mode. After you send a fax  
using this feature, the feature will turn itself  
off.  
You can dial a number and start scanning the  
fax into memory—even when the machine is  
sending from memory, receiving faxes or  
printing PC data. The LCD shows the new job  
number and available memory.  
The number of pages you can scan into the  
memory will vary depending on the data that  
is printed on them.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Load your document.  
Note  
c Press a or b to choose  
Overseas Mode.  
If the Out of Memorymessage appears  
while scanning a document, press  
Stop/Exit to cancel or Black Start to send  
the scanned pages.  
d Press d or c to choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
Delayed Faxing  
(Black & White only)  
Real time transmission  
5
5
When you are sending a fax, the machine will  
scan the document into the memory before  
sending. Then, as soon as the telephone line  
is free, the machine will start dialing and  
sending.  
During the day you can store up to 50 faxes  
in the memory to be sent within 24-hours.  
These faxes will be sent at the time of day you  
enter in step e.  
If the memory is full or you are sending a color  
fax, the machine will send the document in  
real time (even if Real Time TXis set to  
Off).  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Load your document.  
c Press a or b to choose Delayed Fax.  
Sometimes, you may want to send an  
important document immediately, without  
waiting for memory transmission. You can  
turn on Real Time TX.  
d Press d or c to choose On.  
Press OK.  
e Enter the time you want the fax to be  
a Press  
(Fax).  
sent (in 24-hour format).  
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Real Time TX.  
c Press d or c to choose On.  
Press OK.  
Note  
The number of pages you can scan into  
the memory depends on the amount of  
data that is printed on each page.  
Note  
In real time transmission, the automatic  
redial feature does not work when using  
the scanner glass.  
46  
               
Sending a Fax  
Delayed Batch Transmission  
(Black & White only)  
Setting your changes as the  
new default  
5
5
Before sending the delayed faxes, your  
machine will help you economize by sorting  
all the faxes in the memory by destination and  
scheduled time. All delayed faxes that are  
scheduled to be sent at the same time to the  
same fax number will be sent as one fax to  
save transmission time.  
You can save the fax settings for  
Fax Resolution, Contrast,  
Glass ScanSizeand Real Time TXyou  
use most often by setting them as default.  
These settings will stay until you change  
them again.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press a or b to choose the menu setting  
you want to change, and then press  
d or c to choose the new option.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Batch TX.  
5
c Press d or c to choose On.  
Press OK.  
Repeat this step for each setting you  
want to change.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
c After changing the last setting, press  
a or b to choose Set New Default.  
Press OK.  
Checking and canceling  
waiting jobs  
5
You can check which jobs are still waiting in  
the memory to be sent and cancel a job. (If  
there are no jobs, the LCD shows  
No Jobs Waiting.)  
d Press 1 to choose Yes.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Restoring all settings to the  
factory settings  
a Press Menu.  
5
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
You can restore all the settings you have  
changed to the factory settings. These  
settings will stay until you change them again.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Remaining Jobs.  
Press OK.  
Any waiting jobs appear on the LCD.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
d Press a or b to scroll through the jobs  
and choose the job you want to cancel.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Factory Reset.  
Press OK.  
e Do one of the following:  
c Press 1 to choose Yes.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
To cancel, press 1 to choose Yes.  
If you want to cancel another job go  
to step d.  
To exit without canceling, press 2 to  
choose No.  
f When you have finished, press  
Stop/Exit.  
47  
               
Chapter 5  
Sending a fax manually  
5
Out of Memory message  
5
Manual transmission lets you hear the  
dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while  
sending a fax.  
If you get an Out of Memorymessage  
while scanning the first page of a fax, press  
Stop/Exit to cancel the fax.  
If you get an Out of Memorymessage  
while scanning a subsequent page, you will  
have the option to press Black Start to send  
the pages scanned so far, or to press  
Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Load your document.  
c To listen for a dial tone press Hook or  
pick up the handset of an external  
telephone.  
Note  
If you get an Out of Memorymessage  
while faxing and you do not want to delete  
your stored faxes to clear the memory,  
you can send the fax in real time. (See  
d Dial the fax number.  
e When you hear the fax tone, press  
Black Start or Color Start.  
If you are using the scanner glass  
press 1 to send a fax.  
f If you picked up the handset of an  
external telephone, replace it.  
Sending a fax at the end of a  
conversation  
5
At the end of a conversation you can send a  
fax to the other party before you both hang  
up.  
a Ask the other party to wait for fax tones  
(beeps) and then to press the Start or  
Send key before hanging up.  
b Load your document.  
c Press Black Start or Color Start.  
If you are using the scanner glass,  
press 1 to send a fax.  
d Replace the handset of the external  
phone.  
48  
     
Receiving a Fax  
6
6
Receive modes  
6
You must choose the receive mode depending on the external devices and telephone subscriber  
services you have on your line. The diagrams below will help you choose the correct mode. For  
more detailed information about the receive modes, see Using receive modes on page 51.  
Choose the correct Receive Mode  
6
The correct Receive mode is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber  
services (Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring, etc.) you have (or will be using) on the same line as the  
Brother machine.  
Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?  
6
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring” but different telephone companies may have other names for this  
service such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,  
Date Ident-A-Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. See Distinctive Ring  
on page 69 for instruction on setting up your machine using this feature.  
Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?  
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility  
that Voice mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls. See  
Voice Mail on page 68 for instructions on setting up your machine using this service.  
Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother  
machine?  
Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will automatically answer every call. Voice messages are  
stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Choose External TADas your receive mode.  
Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?  
Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Choose Fax Onlyas your receive mode. See  
Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?  
Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?  
The Fax/Telreceive mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the  
same line. Choose Fax/Telas your receive mode. See Fax/Tel on page 51.  
Important Note: You cannot receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering machine  
with the Fax/Telmode.  
Do you expect to receive very few faxes?  
Choose Manualas your receive mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call  
yourself. See Manual on page 51.  
49  
     
Chapter 6  
To set the receive mode follow the instructions below:  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Initial Setup.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Receive Mode.  
d Press d or c to choose Fax Only, Fax/Tel, External TADor Manual.  
Press OK.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
The LCD will display the current receive mode.  
50  
Receiving a Fax  
External TAD  
6
Using receive modes  
6
External TAD mode lets an external  
answering device manage your incoming  
calls. Incoming calls will be handled in one of  
the following ways:  
Some receive modes answer automatically  
(Fax Onlyand Fax/Tel). You may want to  
change the ring delay before using these  
modes. See Ring Delay on page 52.  
Faxes will be automatically received.  
Fax only  
6
Voice callers can record a message on the  
external TAD.  
Fax only mode will automatically answer  
every call as a fax call.  
(For more information see Connecting an  
Fax/Tel  
6
Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically  
manage incoming calls, by recognizing  
whether they are fax or voice calls and  
handling them in one of the following ways:  
6
Faxes will be automatically received.  
Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you  
to pick up the line. The F/T ring is a fast  
F/T pseudo/double-ring made by your  
machine.  
Manual  
6
Manual mode turns off all automatic  
answering functions unless you are using the  
Distinctive Ring feature.  
To receive a fax in manual mode lift the  
handset of an external telephone or press  
Hook. When you hear fax tones (short  
repeating beeps), press Black Start or  
Color Start. You can also use the Easy  
Receive feature to receive faxes by lifting a  
handset on the same line as the machine.  
51  
                     
Chapter 6  
F/T Ring Time  
(Fax/Tel mode only)  
Receive mode settings  
6
6
Ring Delay  
6
When somebody calls your machine, you and  
your caller will hear the normal telephone ring  
sound. The number of rings is set by the ring  
delay setting.  
The Ring Delay sets the number of times the  
machine rings before it answers in Fax Only  
or Fax/Telmode. If you have external or  
extension telephones on the same line as the  
machine, keep the ring delay setting of 4.  
If the call is a fax, then your machine will  
receive it; however, if it is a voice call the  
machine will sound the F/T ring (a fast  
double-ring) for the time you have set in the  
F/T ring time setting. If you hear the F/T ring  
it means that you have a voice caller on the  
line.  
a Press Menu.  
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine,  
extension and external telephones will not  
ring; however, you can still answer the call on  
any telephone. (For more information see  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu.  
d Press a or b to choose Ring Delay.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
e Press d or c to choose how many times  
the line rings before the machine  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
answers.  
Press OK.  
If you choose 0, the line will not ring at  
all.  
d Press a or b to choose  
F/T Ring Time.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
e Press d or c to choose how long the  
machine will ring to alert you that you  
have a voice call (20, 30, 40 or 70  
seconds).  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Even if the caller hangs up during the  
pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will  
continue to ring for the set time.  
52  
         
Receiving a Fax  
Easy Receive  
6
Additional receiving  
operations  
6
If Easy Receive is On:  
6
The machine receives a fax call  
Printing a reduced incoming  
fax  
automatically, even if you answer the call.  
When you see Receivingon the LCD or  
when you hear “chirps” through the handset  
you are using, just replace the handset. Your  
machine will do the rest.  
6
If you choose On, the machine automatically  
reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on  
one page of Letter, Legal or A4 size paper.  
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by  
using the page size of the fax and your Paper  
Size setting. (See Paper Size and Type  
If Easy Receive is Off:  
6
If you are at the machine and answer a call  
first by lifting a handset, then press  
Black Start or Color Start, and then press 2  
to receive.  
a Press Menu.  
6
If you answered at an extension telephone  
press l 5 1. (See Using external and  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
Note  
• If this feature is set to On, but your  
machine does not connect a fax call when  
you lift an extension or external telephone  
handset, press the fax receive code l 5 1.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Auto Reduction.  
e Press d or c to choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
• If you send faxes from a computer on the  
same telephone line and the machine  
intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Easy Receive.  
e Press d or c to choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
53  
       
Chapter 6  
Setting the Receiving Priority  
6
When a Ledger Color fax is sent to your machine, your machine will receive either a Ledger  
black & white fax or a Letter Color fax depending on the Receiving Priority setting. If your receiving  
priority is B&W(Max.LGR), you will receive a Ledger black & white fax. If your receiving priority is  
Color(Max.LTR), you will receive a Letter Color fax.  
Note  
The default setting is B&W(Max.LGR), so the machine cannot receive a color fax unless the  
receiving priority setting is Color(Max.LTR).  
“Memory Receive” (On)  
Fax Storage  
Receiving  
Priority  
Document Document  
Sent Received  
Fax Preview  
Paging  
PC-FAX  
Storage OFF  
Fax Forward  
CLR (Max. LTR)  
LTR Color LTR  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Color  
B/W  
(Color Printout)  
LGR Color LTR  
(Reduced)  
(Color Printout) (Color Printout) (Color Printout)  
LTR B/W LTR  
LGR B/W LTR  
(Reduced)  
Available  
(Up to  
LTR/A4 size)  
B/W (Max. LGR)  
LTR B/W LTR  
LGR B/W LGR  
LTR B/W LTR  
LGR B/W LGR  
Available  
Available  
B/W Printout  
Color  
B/W  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose B&W/Color.  
e Press d or c to choose B&W(Max.LGR)or Color(Max.LTR).  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
54  
   
Receiving a Fax  
Receiving a fax at the end of a  
conversation  
Receiving faxes into memory  
when the paper tray is empty  
(Black & White only)  
6
6
At the end of a conversation you can ask the  
other party to fax you information before you  
both hang up.  
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty  
during fax reception, the LCD shows  
No Paper Fedand begins receiving faxes  
into the machine’s memory. Put some paper  
in the paper tray. (See Loading paper and  
a Ask the other party to place the  
document in their machine and to press  
the Start or Send key.  
b When you hear the other machine's  
CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps),  
press Black Start or Color Start.  
c Press 2 to receive a fax.  
6
d Replace the handset of the external  
telephone.  
Printing a fax from the  
memory  
6
If you have chosen paging or fax storage, you  
can still print a fax from the memory when you  
are at your machine. If you have chosen  
Fax Preview, see Fax Preview  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Print Fax.  
Press OK.  
d Press Black Start.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
When you print a fax from the memory, the  
fax data will be erased.  
55  
       
Chapter 6  
Fax Forwarding  
6
Memory Receive  
(Black & White only)  
6
When you choose Fax Forwarding, your  
machine stores the received fax in the  
memory. The machine will then dial the fax  
number you have programmed and forward  
the fax message.  
You can only use one Memory Receive  
operation at a time:  
Fax Forwarding  
Paging  
a Press Menu.  
Fax Storage  
PC Fax Receive  
Off  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
You can change your selection at any time. If  
received faxes are still in the machine’s  
memory when you change the Memory  
Receive operations, a LCD question will  
appear on the LCD. (See Changing Memory  
d Press a or b to choose  
Memory Receive.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose Fax Forward.  
Press OK.  
f Enter the forwarding number (up to 20  
digits).  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose  
Backup Print:Onor  
Backup Print:Off.  
Press OK.  
Note  
• If you choose Backup Print:On, the  
machine will also print the fax at your  
machine so you will have a copy. This is  
the safety feature in case there is a power  
failure before the fax is forwarded or a  
problem at the receiving machine. This  
Backup Print:Onfeature will not work  
if you also set Fax Preview:On.  
The machine can store faxesapproximately  
24 hours if there is a power failure.  
• Color faxes will be stored in the machine's  
memory only if you have chosen  
B&W(Max.LGR)as your Receiving  
Priority setting. (See Setting the Receiving  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
56  
   
Receiving a Fax  
g Do one of the following:  
Paging  
6
If your pager needs a PIN, enter the  
PIN, press #, press Redial/Pause,  
and then enter your fax number  
followed by # #.  
When you choose Paging, your machine  
dials the pager number you have  
programmed, and then dials your PIN  
(Personal Identification Number). This  
activates your pager so you will know that you  
have a fax message in the memory.  
Press OK.  
For example, press:  
1 2 3 4 5 # Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5  
If you have set Paging, a backup copy of the  
received fax will automatically be printed at  
the machine.  
5 6 7 8 9 # #  
If you do not need a PIN, press:  
a Press Menu.  
Redial/Pause, and then enter your  
fax number followed by # #.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
For example, press:  
Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 # #  
6
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Memory Receive.  
Press OK.  
Note  
• You cannot change a paging number or  
PIN remotely.  
• Color faxes will be stored in the machine's  
memory only if you have chosen  
B&W(Max.LGR)as your Receiving  
Priority setting. (See Setting the Receiving  
e Press a or b to choose Paging.  
Press OK.  
f Enter your pager phone number  
followed by # # (up to 20 digits).  
Press OK.  
Do not include the area code if it is the  
same as that of your machine.  
For example, press:  
1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 # #.  
57  
 
Chapter 6  
Fax Storage  
6
PC Fax Receive  
6
If you choose Fax Storage, your machine  
stores the received fax in the memory. You  
will be able to retrieve fax messages from  
another location using the remote retrieval  
commands.  
If you turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature  
your machine will store received faxes in  
memory and send them to your PC  
automatically. You can then use your PC to  
view and store these faxes.  
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night  
or on the weekend, for example), your  
machine will receive and store your faxes in  
its memory. The number of received faxes  
that are stored in the memory will appear at  
the bottom left side of the LCD.  
If you have set Fax Storage, a backup copy  
will automatically be printed at the machine.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
When you start your PC and the PC-FAX  
Receiving software runs, your machine  
transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
To transfer the received faxes to your PC you  
must have the PC-FAX Receiving software  
running on your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX  
receiving in the Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
d Press a or b to choose  
Memory Receive.  
Press OK.  
If you choose Backup Print:Onthe  
machine will also print the fax.  
e Press a or b to choose Fax Storage.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Color faxes will be stored in the machine's  
memory only if you have chosen  
B&W(Max.LGR)as your Receiving  
Priority setting. (See Setting the Receiving  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Memory Receive.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose  
PC Fax Receive.  
Press OK.  
f Press a or b to choose <USB>or the PC  
you want to receive.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose  
Backup Print:Onor  
Backup Print:Off.  
Press OK.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
58  
     
Receiving a Fax  
Changing the destination PC  
6
Note  
• PC Fax Receive is not supported in the  
®
a Press Menu.  
Mac OS .  
• Before you can set up PC Fax Receive  
you must install the MFL-Pro Suite  
software on your PC. Make sure your PC  
is connected and turned on. (For details  
see PC-FAX receiving in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
• In the event of a power failure, the  
machine will store your faxes in the  
memory for approximately 24 hours.  
However, if you choose  
d Press a or b to choose  
Memory Receive.  
Press OK.  
Backup Print:Onthe machine will print  
the fax, so you will have a copy if there is  
a power failure before it is sent to the PC.  
e Press a or b to choose  
PC Fax Receive.  
Press OK.  
6
• If you get an error message and the  
machine cannot print the faxes in memory,  
you can use this setting to transfer your  
faxes to your PC. (For details, see Error  
f Press a or b to choose Change.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose <USB>or the PC  
you want to receive.  
Press OK.  
• Color faxes will be stored in the machine's  
memory only if you have chosen  
B&W(Max.LGR)as your Receiving  
Priority setting. (See Setting the Receiving  
h Press a or b to choose  
Backup Print:Onor  
Backup Print:Off.  
Press OK.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
59  
 
Chapter 6  
Turning off Memory Receive  
Operations  
Changing Memory Receive  
Operations  
6
6
If received faxes are left in your machine’s  
memory when you change the Memory  
Receive Operations, the LCD will ask you  
one of the following questions:  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
Erase All Fax?  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
Yes i Press 1  
No  
i Press 2  
Print All Fax?  
d Press a or b to choose  
Memory Receive.  
Press OK.  
Yes i Press 1  
No  
i Press 2  
e Press a or b to choose Off.  
Press OK.  
• If you press 1, faxes in the memory will  
be erased or printed before the setting  
changes. If a backup copy has already  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
been printed it will not be printed again.  
• If you press 2, faxes in the memory will  
not be erased or printed and the setting  
will be unchanged.  
Note  
The LCD will give you more options if  
there are received faxes still in your  
machine’s memory. (See Changing  
If received faxes are left in the machine's  
memory when you change to  
PC Fax Receivefrom another option  
[Fax Forward, Pagingor Fax Storage],  
press a or b to choose the PC.  
The LCD will ask you the following message:  
Send Fax to PC?  
Yes i Press 1  
No  
i Press 2  
• If you press 1, faxes in the memory will  
be sent to your PC before the setting  
changes. You will be asked if you want  
to turn on Backup Print. (For detail, see  
• If you press 2, faxes in the memory will  
not be erased or transferred to your PC  
and the setting will be unchanged.  
60  
     
Receiving a Fax  
Using Fax Preview  
6
Fax Preview  
(Black & White only)  
When you receive a fax, you will see the pop-  
up message on the LCD. (For example:  
New Fax(es): 02)  
6
How to preview a received fax  
6
a Press Fax Preview.  
You can see the new fax list.  
You can view received faxes on the LCD by  
pressing the Fax Preview key. When the  
machine is in Ready mode, a popup message  
will appear on the LCD to alert you of new  
faxes.  
Note  
• If you receive a fax containing multiple  
paper sizes (for example, a Letter size  
page and a Ledger size page), the  
machine creates and stores a file for each  
paper size. The LCD will show that more  
than one fax job has been received.  
Setting Fax Preview  
6
a Press Fax Preview.  
• You can also see your old fax list by  
pressing l. Press # to go back to your new  
fax list.  
6
b Press 1 to choose Yes.  
LCD asks you again to make sure that  
faxes will not be printed.  
Press 1 to choose OK.  
b Press a or b to choose the fax you want  
to see.  
Note  
Press OK.  
• Color faxes will be stored in the machine's  
memory only if you have chosen  
B&W(Max.LGR)as your Receiving  
Priority setting. (See Setting the Receiving  
Note  
• If your fax is large there may be a delay  
before it is displayed on the LCD.  
• The LCD will show the current page  
number and total pages of the fax  
message. When your fax message is over  
99 pages the total number of pages will be  
shown as “XX“.  
• When Fax Preview is turned on a backup  
copy of received faxes will not be printed,  
even if you have set Backup Print to On.  
• Fax Preview is not available when Fax  
Forwarding is turned on.  
61  
     
Chapter 6  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
How to delete all faxes in the list  
6
When a fax is open the control panel keys will  
perform the operations shown below.  
a Press Fax Preview.  
b Press a or b to choose Delete All.  
Press OK.  
Key  
Description  
Press 1 to confirm.  
Enlarge the fax.  
Reduce the fax.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
a or b  
d or c  
Scroll vertically.  
How to print all faxes in the list  
6
Scroll horizontally.  
Rotate the fax clockwise.  
Delete the fax.  
a Press Fax Preview.  
b Press a or b to choose Print All.  
Press OK.  
Press 1 to confirm.  
Go back to the previous page.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Go to the next page.  
Go to the next step.  
(Print, Back and Exit are  
available.)  
Go back to the fax list.  
Print the fax.  
Do one of the following:  
Black Start  
Press 1 to print the whole  
message.  
Press 2 to print only the  
displayed page.  
Press 3 to print from the  
displayed page.  
(After printing, you can choose  
to delete or keep the fax.)  
62  
 
Receiving a Fax  
Changing the settings to turn  
off fax preview  
Remote Retrieval  
6
6
You can call your machine from any touch  
tone telephone or fax machine, then use the  
remote access code and remote commands  
to retrieve fax messages.  
a Press Fax Preview.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Fax Preview i Off.  
Press OK.  
Setting a Remote Access  
Code  
The LCD will ask you the following  
message:  
6
Turn Off Fax Preview and print  
all future incoming faxes?  
Yes i Press 1  
The remote access code lets you access the  
remote retrieval features when you are away  
from your machine. Before you can use the  
remote access and retrieval features, you  
have to set up your own code. The factory  
default code is inactive code (--- ).  
No  
i Press 2  
c Press 1 to choose Yes.  
The LCD will ask you the following  
message:  
6
a Press Menu.  
Continue  
Print all faxes i 2  
Cancel i 3  
i 1  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
d Do one of the following:  
c Press a or b to choose  
Remote Access.  
To turn off Fax Previewwithout  
printing your stored faxes, press 1.  
Press 1 to confirm your faxes will be  
deleted.  
d Enter a three-digit code using numbers  
0-9, l, or #.  
Press OK. (The preset ‘ ’ cannot be  
changed.)  
To print all your stored faxes before  
turning off Fax Preview, press 2.  
If you want to exit without turning off  
Fax Preview, press 3.  
Note  
Do not use the same code as your Fax  
Receive Code (l 5 1) or Telephone  
Answer Code (# 5 1). (See Using external  
Press Stop/Exit.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
You can change your code at any time by  
entering a new one. If you want to make  
your code inactive, press Clear/Back in  
step d to restore the inactive setting (--- )  
and press OK.  
63  
       
Chapter 6  
Using your Remote Access  
Code  
6
a Dial your fax number from a touch tone  
telephone or another fax machine.  
b When your machine answers, enter  
your remote access code (3 digits  
followed by ) at once.  
c The machine signals if it has received  
messages:  
1 long beep — Fax messages  
No beeps — No messages  
d When the machine gives two short  
beeps, enter a command.  
The machine will hang up if you wait  
longer than 30 seconds to enter a  
command.  
The machine will beep three times if you  
enter an invalid command.  
e Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you  
have finished.  
f Hang up.  
Note  
If your machine is set to Manualmode  
and you want to use the remote retrieval  
features, wait about 100 seconds after it  
starts ringing, and then enter the remote  
access code within 30 seconds.  
64  
 
Receiving a Fax  
Remote Fax commands  
6
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you  
call the machine and enter your remote access code (3 digits followed by ), the system will give  
two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.  
Remote commands  
95 Change the Fax Forwarding,  
Operation details  
Paging or Fax Storage settings  
1 OFF  
You can choose Offafter you have retrieved or erased all  
your messages.  
2 Fax Forwarding  
3 Paging  
One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear  
three short beeps, you cannot change because something  
has not been set up (for example, a Fax Forwarding or  
Paging number has not been registered). You can register  
your Fax Forwarding number by entering 4. (See Changing  
registered the number, Fax Forwarding will work.  
4 Fax Forwarding number  
6 Fax Storage  
6
96  
Retrieve a fax  
2 Retrieve all faxes  
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored  
3 Erase faxes from the memory  
If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased  
from the memory.  
97  
98  
Check the receiving status  
1 Fax  
You can check whether your machine has received any  
faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear  
three short beeps.  
Change the Receive Mode  
1 External TAD  
2 Fax/Tel  
If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.  
3 Fax Only  
90  
Exit  
Pressing 9 0 allows you to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the  
long beep, then replace the handset.  
65  
 
Chapter 6  
Retrieving fax messages  
6
Changing your Fax  
Forwarding number  
6
You can call your machine from any touch  
tone telephone and have your fax messages  
sent to a machine. Before you use this  
feature, you have to turn on Fax Storage.  
You can change the default setting of your fax  
forwarding number from another touch tone  
telephone or fax machine.  
a Dial your fax number.  
a Dial your fax number.  
b When your machine answers, enter  
your remote access code (3 digits  
followed by ) at once. If you hear one  
long beep, you have messages.  
b When your machine answers, enter  
your remote access code (3 digits  
followed by ) at once. If you hear one  
long beep, you have messages.  
c When you hear two short beeps,  
press 9 6 2.  
c When you hear two short beeps,  
press 9 5 4.  
d Wait for the long beep, enter the number  
(up to 20 digits) of the remote fax  
d Wait for the long beep, enter the new  
number (up to 20 digits) of the remote  
fax machine you want your fax  
messages forwarded to using the dial  
pad, then enter # #.  
machine you want your fax messages  
sent to using the dial pad, then enter # #.  
Note  
You cannot use l and # as dial numbers.  
However, press # if you want to create a  
pause.  
Note  
You cannot use l and # as dial numbers.  
However, press # if you want to create a  
pause.  
e Hang up after you hear your machine  
beep. Your machine will call the other  
fax machine, which will then print your  
fax messages.  
e Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you  
have finished.  
f Hang up after you hear your machine  
beep.  
66  
       
Telephone Servicesand External  
devices  
7
7
Fax/Tel mode when the power  
key is off  
Voice operations  
7
7
Voice calls can be made either with an  
external telephone, by dialing manually, or by  
using Quick Dial numbers.  
You can change the default setting of the  
On/Off key to Fax Receive:Onso that you  
can receive faxes when the power key is off.  
mode will work in the following way.  
Tone or Pulse (Canada only)  
7
If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need  
to send Tone signals (for example, for  
telephone banking), follow the instructions  
below:  
Fax/Tel mode does not work when the power  
key is off. The machine will not answer  
telephone or fax calls and will keep ringing. If  
you are at an external or extension  
telephone, lift the handset and talk. If you  
hear fax tones, hold the handset until Easy  
Receive activates your machine. If the other  
party says they want to send you a fax,  
activate the machine by pressing l 5 1.  
a Pick up the handset of an external  
telephone or press Hook.  
7
b Press # on the machine’s control panel.  
Any digits dialed after this will send tone  
signals.  
When you hang up, the machine will return to  
the Pulse dialing service.  
Fax/Tel mode when the power  
key is on  
7
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will  
use the F/T Ring Time (pseudo/double-  
ringing) to alert you to pick up a voice call.  
If you are at an extension telephone, you'll  
need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring  
Time and then press # 5 1 between the  
pseudo/double-rings. If no one is on the line,  
or if someone wants to send you a fax, send  
the call back to the machine by pressing  
l 5 1.  
If you are at the machine, lift the external  
telephone’s handset, and then press Hook to  
answer.  
67  
         
Chapter 7  
Get the Distinctive Ring service from your  
telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a  
feature of your Brother machine that allows a  
person with one line to receive fax and voice  
calls through two different phone numbers on  
that one line. Brother uses the term  
Telephone services  
7
Your machine supports the Caller ID and  
Distinctive Ring subscriber telephone  
services that some telephone companies  
offer.  
‘Distinctive Ring,’ but telephone companies  
market the service under a variety of names,  
such as Custom Ringing, Personalized Ring,  
Smart Ring, RingMaster, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-  
A-Call, Data Ident-A-Call, Teen Ring, and  
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing.  
This service establishes a second telephone  
number on the same line as your existing  
telephone number, and each number has its  
own ring pattern. Typically, the original  
number rings with the standard ring pattern  
and is used for receiving voice calls, and the  
second number rings with a different ring  
pattern and is used for receiving faxes. (See  
Features like Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Call  
Waiting/Caller ID, RingMaster, answering  
services, alarm systems or other custom  
features on one telephone line may affect the  
way your machine works. If you have Voice  
Mail on your telephone line, please read the  
following carefully.  
Voice Mail  
7
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone  
line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and  
the Brother machine will conflict with each  
other when receiving incoming calls.  
OR  
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to  
answer after 4 rings and your Brother  
machine is set to answer after 2 rings, then  
your Brother machine will answer first. This  
will prevent callers from being able to leave a  
message in your Voice Mail.  
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to  
“Manual.” Manual Mode requires that you  
answer every incoming call if you want to be  
able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a  
telephone call, then complete the call as you  
normally would. If you hear fax sending tones  
you must transfer the call to the Brother  
telephones on page 77.) Unanswered fax  
and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail. (To  
set the machine in MANUAL Mode, see  
Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to  
answer after 4 rings and your Voice Mail is set  
to answer after 2 rings, then your Voice Mail  
will answer first. This will prevent your Brother  
machine from being able to receive an  
incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot  
transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother  
machine.  
To avoid conflicts between your Brother  
machine and your voice mail service, do one  
of the following:  
68  
   
Telephone Services and External devices  
What does Brother's ‘Distinctive Ring’  
do?  
Distinctive Ring  
7
7
Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother  
machine that allows a person with one line to  
receive fax and voice calls through two  
different phone numbers on that one line.  
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring”, but  
telephone companies market the service  
under a variety of names, such as Smart  
Ring, Ring Master or Ident-a-Ring. This  
service establishes a second telephone  
number on the same line as your existing  
telephone number, and each number has its  
own ring pattern. Typically, the original  
number rings with the standard ring pattern  
and is used for receiving voice calls, and the  
second number rings with a different ring  
pattern and is used for receiving faxes.  
The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring  
feature that allows you to use your machine to  
take full advantage of the telephone  
company's Distinctive Ring service. The new  
telephone number on your line can just  
receive faxes.  
Do you have Voice Mail?  
7
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line  
that you will install your new machine on,  
there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail  
and the machine will conflict with each other  
while receiving incoming calls. However, the  
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use  
more than one number on your line, so  
both Voice Mail and the machine can work  
together without any problems. If each one  
has a separate telephone number, neither will  
interfere with the other's operations.  
Note  
7
• You must pay for your telephone  
company's Distinctive Ring service before  
you program the machine to work with it.  
If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring  
service from the telephone company, you will  
need to follow the directions on next page to  
‘register’ the new Distinctive Ring pattern  
they give you. This is so your machine can  
recognize its incoming calls.  
• Please call your telephone company for  
availability and rates.  
What does your telephone company's  
‘Distinctive Ring’ do?  
7
Note  
Your telephone company's Distinctive Ring  
service allows you to have more than one  
number on the same telephone line. If you  
need more than one telephone number, it  
is cheaper than paying for an extra line.  
Each telephone number has its own  
You can change or cancel the Distinctive  
Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it  
off temporarily, and turn it back on later.  
When you get a new fax number, make  
sure you reset this feature.  
distinctive ring pattern, so you will know  
which telephone number is ringing. This is  
one way you can have a separate telephone  
number for your machine.  
69  
   
Chapter 7  
Before you choose the ring pattern to  
register  
Registering the Distinctive Ring  
pattern  
7
7
You can only register one Distinctive Ring  
pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns  
cannot be registered. The ring patterns below  
are supported by your Brother machine.  
Register the one your telephone company  
gives you.  
After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature  
to On, your Distinctive Ring number will  
receive faxes automatically. The receive  
mode is automatically set to Manualand you  
cannot change it to another receive mode  
while Distinctive Ring is set to On. This  
ensures the Brother machine will only answer  
the Distinctive Ring number and not interfere  
when your main telephone number is called.  
Ring  
Rings  
Pattern  
1
2
3
4
long-long  
a Press Menu.  
short-long-short  
short-short-long  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
very long (normal  
pattern)  
c Press a or b to choose  
Miscellaneous.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Ring Pattern #1 is often called short-short  
and is the most commonly used.  
If the ring pattern you received is not on  
this chart, please call your telephone  
company and ask for one that is  
shown.  
d Press a or b to choose Distinctive.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose Set.  
Press OK.  
f Press a or b to choose the stored ring  
pattern you want to use.  
The machine will only answer calls to its  
Press OK.  
registered number.  
(You hear each pattern as you scroll  
through the four patterns. Make sure  
you choose the pattern that the  
telephone company gave you.)  
The first two rings are silent on the  
machine. This is because the fax must  
‘listen’ to the ring pattern (to compare it to  
the pattern that was ‘registered’). (Other  
telephones on the same line will ring.)  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
Distinctive Ring is now set to On.  
If you program the machine properly, it will  
recognize the registered ring pattern of the  
‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns and  
then answer with a fax tone. When the  
‘voice number’ is called, the machine will  
not answer.  
70  
 
Telephone Services and External devices  
Turning off Distinctive Ring  
7
Caller ID  
7
a Press Menu.  
The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller  
ID subscriber service offered by many local  
telephone companies. Call your telephone  
company for details. This service shows the  
telephone number, or name if it is available,  
of your caller as the line rings.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Miscellaneous.  
Press OK.  
After a few rings, the LCD shows the  
telephone number of your caller (and name, if  
available). Once you answer a call, the Caller  
ID information disappears from the LCD, but  
the call information stays stored in the Caller  
ID memory.  
d Press a or b to choose Distinctive.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose Off.  
Press OK.  
You can see the first 18 characters of the  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
number (or name).  
The # Unavailablemessage means  
the call originated outside your Caller ID  
service area.  
Note  
If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the  
machine will stay in Manualreceive  
mode. You will need to set the Receive  
Mode again. (See Choose the correct  
7
The Private Callmessage means the  
caller has intentionally blocked  
transmission of information.  
You can print a list of the Caller ID information  
received by your machine. (See How to print  
Note  
• This feature may not be available in  
certain areas of the USA and Canada.  
• The Caller ID service varies with different  
carriers. Call your local telephone  
company to find out about the kind of  
service available in your area.  
71  
     
Chapter 7  
Setting up your area code (USA only)  
7
Connecting an external  
TAD (telephone  
answering device)  
When returning calls from the caller ID history  
your machine will automatically dial “1” plus  
the area code for all calls. If your local dialing  
plan requires that the “1” not be used for calls  
within your area code enter your area code in  
this setting. With the area code setting, calls  
returned from the caller ID history to your  
area code will be dialed using 10 digits (area  
code + 7-digit number). If your dialing plan  
does not follow the standard 1 + area code +  
7-digit number dialing system for calling  
outside your area code, you may experience  
problems returning calls automatically from  
the caller ID history. If this is not the  
7
You may choose to connect an external  
answering device. However, when you have  
an external TAD on the same telephone line  
as the machine, the TAD answers all calls  
and the machine ‘listens’ for fax calling (CNG)  
tones. If it hears them, the machine takes  
over the call and receives the fax. If it does  
not hear CNG tones, the machine lets the  
TAD continue playing your outgoing message  
so your caller can leave you a voice  
message.  
procedure followed by your dialing plan, you  
will not be able to return calls automatically.  
The TAD must answer within four rings (the  
recommended setting is two rings). The  
machine cannot hear CNG tones until the  
TAD has answered the call, and with four  
rings there are only 8 to 10 seconds of CNG  
tones left for the fax ‘handshake’. Make sure  
you carefully follow the instructions in this  
guide for recording your outgoing message.  
We do not recommend using the toll saver  
feature on your external answering machine if  
it exceeds five rings.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Miscellaneous.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Caller ID.  
Press OK.  
e Use the dial pad to enter your area code.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
72  
   
Telephone Services and External devices  
Connections  
7
Note  
• If you do not receive all your faxes,  
shorten the Ring Delay setting on your  
external TAD.  
The external TAD must be plugged into the  
jack labeled EXT. Your machine cannot work  
properly if you plug the TAD into a wall jack  
(unless you are using Distinctive Ring).  
• If You Subscribe to your Telephone  
company's Distinctive Ring Service:  
a Plug the telephone line cord from the  
telephone wall jack into the jack labeled  
LINE.  
You may connect an external TAD to a  
separate wall jack only if you subscribe to  
your telephone company's Distinctive  
Ring service, have registered the  
distinctive ring pattern on your machine,  
and use that number as a fax number. The  
recommended setting is at least four rings  
on the external TAD when you have the  
telephone company's Distinctive Ring  
Service. You cannot use the Toll Saver  
setting.  
b Plug the telephone line cord from the  
external TAD into the jack labeled EXT.  
(Make sure this cord is connected to the  
TAD at the TAD's telephone line jack,  
and not its handset jack.)  
c Set your external TAD to four rings or  
less. (The machine's Ring Delay setting  
does not apply.)  
• If You Do Not Subscribe to Distinctive  
Ring Service:  
7
d Record the outgoing message on your  
You must plug your TAD into the EXT.  
jack of your machine. If your TAD is  
plugged into a wall jack, both your  
machine and the TAD will try to control the  
telephone line. (See the illustration  
below.)  
external TAD.  
e Set the TAD to answer calls.  
f Set the Receive Mode to  
External TAD. (See Choose the  
1
1
1
TAD  
When the TAD answers a call, the LCD  
shows Telephone.  
73  
 
Chapter 7  
Recording outgoing message  
(OGM) on an external TAD  
Special line considerations  
7
7
Roll over telephone lines  
7
Timing is important in recording this message.  
The message sets up the ways to handle both  
manual and automatic fax reception.  
A roll over telephone system is a group of two  
or more separate telephone lines that pass  
incoming calls to each other if they are busy.  
The calls are usually passed down or ‘rolled  
over’ to the next available telephone line in a  
preset order.  
a Record 5 seconds of silence at the  
beginning of your message. (This allows  
your machine time to listen for the fax  
CNG tones of automatic transmissions  
before they stop.)  
Your machine can work in a roll over system  
as long as it is the last number in the  
sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not  
put the machine on any of the other numbers;  
when the other lines are busy and a second  
fax call is received, the fax call will be sent to  
a line that does not have a fax machine. Your  
b Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.  
c End your 20-second message by giving  
your Fax Receive Code for people  
sending manual faxes. For example:  
‘After the beep, leave a message or  
machine will work best on a dedicated line.  
send a fax by pressing l 5 1 and Start.’  
Two-line telephone system  
7
Note  
A two-line telephone system is nothing more  
than two separate telephone numbers on the  
same wall outlet. The two telephone numbers  
can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or mixed into  
one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be  
plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14  
jacks may be equal in size and appearance  
and both may contain four wires (black, red,  
green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in  
a two-line telephone and see if it can access  
both lines. If it can, you must separate the line  
for your machine. (See page 53.)  
We recommend beginning your OGM with  
an initial 5-second silence because the  
machine cannot hear fax tones over a  
resonant or loud voice. You may try  
omitting this pause, but if your machine  
has trouble receiving, then you must  
re-record the OGM to include it.  
74  
       
Telephone Services and External devices  
a Put the two-line TAD and the two-line  
Converting telephone wall outlets  
7
telephone next to your machine.  
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11  
jack. The first two ways may require help from  
the telephone company. You can change the  
wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11  
jacks. Or you can have an RJ11 wall outlet  
installed and slave or jump one of the  
telephone numbers to it.  
b Plug one end of the telephone line cord  
for your machine into the L2 jack of the  
triplex adapter. Plug the other end into  
the LINE jack on the back of the  
machine.  
c Plug one end of the first telephone line  
cord for your TAD into the L1 jack of the  
triplex adapter. Plug the other end into  
the L1 or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.  
The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex  
adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into  
an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two  
separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a  
third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your  
machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into  
L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on  
Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triple adapter.  
d Plug one end of the second telephone  
line cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of  
the two-line TAD. Plug the other end into  
the EXT. jack on the left side of the  
machine.  
Triplex Adapter  
7
RJ14  
1
7
2
RJ11  
RJ14  
4
3
Installing machine, external two-line  
TAD and two-line telephone  
1
2
3
4
Triplex Adapter  
7
Two Line Telephone  
When you are installing an external two-line  
telephone answering device (TAD) and a  
two-line telephone, your machine must be  
isolated on one line at both the wall jack and  
at the TAD. The most common connection is  
to put the machine on Line 2, which is  
explained in the following steps. The back of  
the two-line TAD must have two telephone  
jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other  
labeled L2. You will need at least three  
telephone line cords, the one that came with  
your machine and two for your external two-  
line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if  
you add a two-line telephone.  
External Two Line TAD  
Machine  
You can keep two-line telephones on other  
wall outlets as always. There are two ways to  
add a two-line telephone to the machine's  
wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line  
cord from the two-line telephone into the  
L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or you can  
plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack  
of the two-line TAD.  
75  
 
Chapter 7  
Multi-line connections (PBX)  
7
External and extension  
telephones  
7
We suggest you ask the company who  
installed your PBX to connect your machine.  
If you have a multi line system we suggest  
you ask the installer to connect the unit to the  
last line on the system. This prevents the  
machine being activated each time the  
system receives telephone calls. If all  
incoming calls will be answered by a  
Connecting an external or  
extension telephone  
7
You can connect a separate telephone or  
telephone answering device directly to your  
machine as shown in the diagram below.  
switchboard operator we recommend that  
you set the Receive Mode to Manual.  
Connect the telephone line cord to the jack  
labeled EXT.  
We cannot guarantee that your machine will  
operate properly under all circumstances  
when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties  
with sending or receiving faxes should be  
reported first to the company who handles  
your PBX.  
1
2
1
2
Extension telephone  
External telephone  
When you are using an external or extension  
telephone, the LCD shows Telephone.  
76  
     
Telephone Services and External devices  
Using external and extension  
telephones  
Using a Non-Brother cordless  
external telephone  
7
7
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is  
connected to the EXT. jack of the machine  
and you typically carry the cordless handset  
elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during  
the Ring Delay.  
Using extension telephones  
7
If you answer a fax call at an extension  
telephone, you can make your machine  
receive the fax by pressing the Fax Receive  
Code l 5 1.  
If you let the machine answer first, you will  
have to go to the machine so you can press  
Hook to send the call to the cordless handset.  
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you  
can take the call at an extension telephone by  
pressing the Telephone Answer Code # 5 1.  
Using remote codes  
7
Fax Receive code  
7
Using an external telephone  
(connected to the EXT. jack of the  
machine)  
If you answer a fax call on an extension  
telephone, you can tell your machine to  
receive it by dialing the Fax Receive Code  
l 5 1. Wait for the chirping sounds then  
replace the handset. (See Easy Receive  
7
7
If you answer a fax call at the external  
telephone, you can make the machine  
receive the fax by pressing Black Start.  
If you answer a fax call at the external  
telephone, you can make the machine  
receive the fax by pressing Black Start.  
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you  
can take the call at the external telephone by  
pressing Hook.  
Telephone Answer code  
7
If you answer a call and no one is on  
the line:  
If you receive a voice call and the machine is  
in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T  
(double) ring after the initial ring delay. If you  
pick up the call on an extension telephone  
you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing # 5 1  
(make sure you press this between the rings).  
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you  
can take the call at the external telephone by  
pressing Hook.  
7
You should assume that you're receiving a  
manual fax.  
Press l 5 1 and wait for the chirp or until the  
LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.  
Note  
You can also use the Easy Receive  
feature to make your machine  
automatically take the call. (See Easy  
77  
         
Chapter 7  
Changing the remote codes  
7
The preset Fax Receive Code is l 5 1. The  
preset Telephone Answer Code is # 5 1. If  
you want to, you can replace them with your  
own codes.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Setup Receive.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Remote Codes.  
e Press d or cto choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
f Enter the new Fax Receive Code.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose Deact.Code:  
and enter the new Telephone Answer  
Code.  
Press OK.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
• If you are always disconnected when  
accessing your external TAD remotely, try  
changing the Fax Receive Code and  
Telephone Answer Code to another three-  
digit code (such as # # # and 9 9 9).  
• Remote Codes might not work with some  
telephone systems.  
78  
 
Dialing and storing numbers  
8
8
Speed Dialing  
8
How to Dial  
8
a Press  
(Phone Book).  
Manual dialing  
8
Press all of the digits of the fax or telephone  
number.  
Or, you can press  
(Fax) and then  
press a or b to choose Phone Book.  
b Press a or b to choose Search.  
Press OK.  
c Do one of the following:  
Press a or b to choose  
Alphabetical Orderor  
Numerical Order.  
Press OK.  
One Touch Dialing  
8
8
Your machine has 3 One Touch keys where  
you can store 6 fax or telephone numbers for  
automatic dialing.  
Press the two-digit Speed Dial  
number using the dial pad. (See  
d Press a or b to choose the number you  
want to dial.  
Press OK.  
Press the One Touch key that stores the  
number you want to call. (See Storing  
access numbers 4 to 6, hold down Shift as  
you press the One Touch key.  
Note  
If the LCD shows Not Registered  
when you enter or search a One Touch or  
Speed Dial number, a number has not  
been stored at this location.  
79  
           
Chapter 8  
c Press a or b to choose Send a fax.  
Press OK.  
Search  
8
You can search for names you have stored in  
the One Touch and Speed Dial memory.  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
Note  
Press  
(Phone Book).  
Or, you can press  
press a or b to choose Phone Book.  
a
In Real Time Transmission the automatic  
redial feature does not work when using  
the scanner glass.  
(Fax) and then  
b Press a or b to choose Search.  
Press OK.  
Outgoing Call  
8
c Press a or b to choose  
Alphabetical Orderor  
Numerical Order.  
Press OK.  
The last 30 numbers you sent a fax to will be  
stored in the outgoing call history. You can  
choose one of these numbers to fax to, add to  
One Touch or Speed Dial, or delete from the  
history.  
Note  
• Press l to make the LCD font size larger.  
a Press Redial/Pause.  
• Press # to make the LCD font size smaller.  
You can also choose Outgoing Call  
by pressing  
(Fax).  
d If you chose Alphabetical Orderin  
step c, use the dial pad to enter the first  
letter of the name, and then press a or b  
to choose the name and number you  
want to call.  
b Press a or b to choose the number you  
want.  
Press OK.  
c Do one of the following:  
Press OK.  
To send a fax, press a or b to choose  
Send a fax.  
Fax Redial  
8
Press OK.  
If you are sending a fax manually and the line  
is busy, press Redial/Pause, and then press  
Black Start or Color Start to try again. If you  
want to make a second call to a number you  
recently dialed, you can press Redial/Pause  
and choose one of the last 30 numbers from  
the Outgoing Call List.  
Press Black Start or Color Start.  
If you want to store the number,  
press a or b to choose  
Add To Phone Book.  
Press OK.  
Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from  
the control panel. If you are sending a fax  
automatically and the line is busy, the  
machine will automatically redial once after  
five minutes.  
Press a or b to choose Delete.  
Press OK.  
a Press Redial/Pause.  
Press 1 to confirm.  
b Press a or b to choose the number you  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
want to redial.  
Press OK.  
80  
       
Dialing and storing numbers  
Caller ID history  
8
Note  
• (USA only) If you redial from the Caller ID  
history outside your area code, you must  
set up your AREA CODE in advance.  
This feature requires the Caller ID subscriber  
service offered by many local telephone  
companies. (See Caller ID on page 71.)  
The number, or name if available, from the  
last 30 faxes and telephone calls you  
• You can print the Caller ID List.  
received will be stored in the Caller ID history.  
You can view the list or choose one of these  
numbers to fax to, add to One Touch or  
Speed Dial, or delete from the history. When  
the thirty-first call comes in to the machine, it  
replaces information about the first call.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Caller ID hist.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the number you  
want.  
Press OK.  
8
d Do one of the following:  
To send a fax, press a or b to choose  
Send a fax.  
Press OK.  
Press Black Start or Color Start.  
If you want to store the number,  
press a or b to choose  
Add To Phone Book.  
Press OK.  
Press a or b to choose Delete.  
Press OK.  
Press 1 to confirm.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
81  
 
Chapter 8  
c Do one of the following:  
Storing numbers  
8
Enter the name (up to 16 characters)  
using the dial pad.  
You can set up your machine to do the  
following types of easy dialing: One Touch,  
Speed Dial and Groups for broadcasting  
faxes. When you dial a Quick Dial number,  
the LCD shows the name, if you stored it, or  
the number.  
Press OK.  
(To help you enter letters, see  
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
Note  
d Enter the fax or telephone number (up to  
If you lose electrical power, the Quick Dial  
numbers that are in the memory will not be  
lost.  
20 digits).  
Press OK.  
Note  
Storing a pause  
8
If you want to store an E-mail address to  
use with Internet fax or Scan to E-mail  
Press Redial/Pause to put a 3.5-second  
pause between numbers. If you are dialing  
overseas, you can press Redial/Pause as  
many times as needed to increase the length  
of the pause.  
server, press  
and then press  
to E-Address. Press  
FAX/TEL/MAIL, and then enter the  
E-mail address and press OK. (See  
a
to choose Dial Type  
or to change the option  
to choose  
,
d
c
b
Storing One Touch Dial  
numbers  
8
e Press a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
Your machine has 3 One Touch keys where  
you can store 6 fax or telephone numbers for  
automatic dialing. To access numbers 4 to 6  
hold down Shift as you press the One Touch  
key.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Storing One Touch numbers from  
Outgoing Calls  
8
a Press the One Touch key where you  
want to store the number.  
You can store One Touch numbers from the  
Outgoing Call history.  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
a Press Redial/Pause.  
Or, you can use the  
key and choose  
(Phone Book)  
You can also choose Outgoing Call  
by pressing  
(Fax).  
Set One Touch Dialto store  
numbers.  
b Press a or b to choose the name or  
number you want to store.  
Press OK.  
b Do one of the following:  
To add a number, press 1 using the  
dial pad.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Add To Phone Book.  
Press OK.  
To exit without adding a number,  
press 2 using the dial pad.  
82  
           
Dialing and storing numbers  
d Press a or b to choose the 2-digit One  
Touch Dial number where you want to  
store the number.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Add To Phone Book.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose the 2-digit  
One Touch location where you want to  
store the number.  
Note  
One Touch Dial numbers begin with (for  
example, l 0 2).  
Press OK.  
Note  
e Do one of the following:  
One Touch Dial numbers begin with (for  
example, l 0 2).  
Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 16 characters).  
Press OK.  
f Do one of the following:  
(To help you enter letters, see  
Enter the name (up to 16 characters)  
using the dial pad.  
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
Press OK.  
(To help you enter letters, see  
f Press OK to confirm the fax or  
telephone number.  
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
8
g Press OK and press a or b to choose  
Complete.  
Press OK.  
g Press OK to confirm the fax or  
telephone number.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
h Press a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
Storing One Touch numbers from the  
Caller ID history  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
8
If you have the Caller ID subscriber service  
from your telephone company you can also  
store One Touch numbers from incoming  
calls in the Caller ID History. (See Caller ID  
Storing Speed Dial numbers  
8
You can store up to 100 2-digit Speed Dial  
locations with a name, and each name can  
have two numbers. When you dial you will  
only have to press a few keys (For example:  
a Press  
(Fax).  
, Search, OK the two-digit number, and  
Black Start or Color Start).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Caller ID hist.  
Press OK.  
a Press  
(Phone Book).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Set Speed Dial.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the number you  
want to store.  
Press OK.  
83  
     
Chapter 8  
c Press a or b to choose the 2-digit  
Speed Dial location where you want to  
store the number.  
Storing Speed Dial numbers from  
Outgoing Calls  
8
You can also store Speed Dial numbers from  
the Outgoing Call history.  
Press OK.  
d Do one of the following:  
a Press Redial/Pause.  
Enter the name (up to 16 characters)  
You can also choose Outgoing Call  
using the dial pad.  
by pressing  
(Fax).  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose the name or  
number you want to store.  
Press OK.  
(To help you enter letters, see  
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Add To Phone Book.  
Press OK.  
e Enter the fax or telephone number (up to  
20 digits).  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose the 2-digit  
Speed Dial location you want to store  
the number in.  
Note  
Press OK.  
If you want to store an E-mail address to  
use with Internet fax or Scan to E-mail  
Note  
server, press  
and then press  
to E-Address. Press  
a
to choose Dial Type  
or to change the option  
to choose  
,
Speed Dial locations begin with # (for  
example, # 0 2).  
d
c
b
FAX/TEL/MAIL, and then enter the  
E-mail address and press OK. (See  
e Do one of the following:  
Enter the name (up to 16 characters)  
using the dial pad.  
f Do one of the following:  
Press OK.  
Enter the second fax or telephone  
(To help you enter letters, see  
number (up to 20 digits).  
Press OK.  
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
If you do not want to store a second  
number, press OK.  
f Press OK to confirm the fax or  
telephone number.  
g Press a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
g Do one of the following:  
Enter the second fax or telephone  
h Do one of the following:  
number (up to 20 digits).  
To store another Speed Dial  
number, go to step c.  
Press OK.  
If you do not want to store a second  
number, press OK.  
To finish the setting, press Stop/Exit.  
h Press a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
84  
     
Dialing and storing numbers  
Storing Speed Dial numbers from the  
Caller ID history  
Changing One Touch or  
Speed Dial names or numbers  
8
8
If you have the Caller ID subscriber service  
from your telephone company you can also  
store Speed Dial numbers from incoming  
calls in the Caller ID History. (See Caller ID  
You can change or delete a One Touch or  
Speed Dial number that has already been  
stored.  
a Press  
(Phone Book).  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Set One Touch Dialor  
Set Speed Dial.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Caller ID hist.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the number you  
c Press a or b to choose the 2-digit  
One Touch or Speed Dial location you  
want to change.  
want to store.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Add To Phone Book.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
d Do one of the following:  
Press a or b to choose Change.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose the 2-digit  
Speed Dial location you want to store  
the number in.  
8
Press a or b to choose Delete.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
f Do one of the following:  
Press 1 to confirm.  
Enter the name (up to 16 characters)  
using the dial pad.  
Go to step j.  
Press OK.  
Note  
(To help you enter letters, see  
How to change the stored name or  
number:  
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
If you want to change a character, press  
d or c to position the cursor under the  
character you want to change, and then  
press Clear/Back. Re-enter the  
character.  
g Press OK to confirm the fax or  
telephone number.  
h Do one of the following:  
Enter the second fax or telephone  
e If you want to change the name, press  
number (up to 20 digits).  
a or b to choose Name, then press and  
c
Press OK.  
enter the new name using the dial pad  
(up to 16 characters).  
Press OK.  
If you do not want to store a second  
number, press OK.  
i Press a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
85  
   
Chapter 8  
f If you want to change the Fax/Tel  
number, press a or b to choose  
Setting up groups for  
broadcasting  
8
Fax/Tel:, then press  
c
and enter the  
new fax or telephone number using the  
dial pad (up to 20 digits).  
Groups, which can be stored on a One Touch  
key or a Speed Dial location, allow you to  
send the same fax message to many fax  
numbers by pressing only a One Touch key  
Note  
For Speed Dial locations you can change  
or a , Search, OK the two-digit location  
and Black Start. First, you'll need to store  
each fax number in a One Touch key or  
Speed-Dial location. Then you can include  
them as numbers in the Group. Each Group  
uses up a One Touch key or Speed Dial  
location. You can have up to six Groups, or  
you can assign up to 204 numbers in a large  
Fax/Tel1:and Fax/Tel2:.  
g Do one of the following:  
If you are changing a Speed Dial  
number, go to step h.  
If you are changing a One Touch  
number, go to step j.  
Group if you have 2 numbers in each location.  
h Do one of the following:  
Enter the second new fax or  
telephone number (up to 20 digits).  
Press OK.  
a Press  
(Phone Book).  
If you do not want to change the  
number, press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Setup Groups.  
Press OK.  
i Press a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose GROUP1,  
GROUP2, GROUP3, GROUP4, GROUP5or  
GROUP6for the Group name where you  
will store the fax numbers.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose the 2-digit One  
Touch or Speed Dial location where you  
want to store the Group.  
Press OK.  
e If you want to change the Group name,  
press a or b to choose  
Change Group Nameand press OK.  
Then enter the new Group name and  
press OK.  
f Press a or b to choose Add Number.  
Press OK.  
86  
         
Dialing and storing numbers  
g To add numbers to the group, press  
a or b to choose  
Changing a Group name  
a Press  
8
(Phone Book).  
Alphabetical Orderor  
Numerical Orderand press OK.  
Press a or b to select a number and  
press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Setup Groups.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the Group name  
you want to change.  
Note  
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.  
Speed Dial locations begin with #.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Change Group Name.  
Press OK.  
h Do one of the following:  
To add another number to the group,  
repeat steps f to g.  
Note  
If you are finished adding numbers to  
the group, press a or b to choose  
Complete.  
How to change the stored name or  
number:  
If you want to change a character, press  
d or c to position the cursor under the  
character you want to change, and then  
press Clear/Back. Re-enter the  
character.  
Press OK.  
i Do one of the following:  
To store another Group for  
8
broadcasting, repeat steps c to h.  
e Enter the new name (up to 16  
characters) using the dial pad.  
Press OK.  
To finish storing Groups for  
broadcasting, press Stop/Exit.  
example, type NEW CLIENTS.)  
Note  
You can print a list of all the One Touch  
and Speed Dial numbers. Group numbers  
will be marked in the GROUP column.  
f Press a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
Deleting a Group  
a Press  
8
(Phone Book).  
b Press a or b to choose Setup Groups.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the Group you  
want to delete.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Delete.  
Press OK.  
Press 1 to confirm.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
87  
   
Chapter 8  
c Enter a or b to choose  
Numerical Order.  
Press OK.  
Deleting a number from a Group  
8
a Press  
(Phone Book).  
b Press a or b to choose Setup Groups.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose #03.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the Group you  
want to change.  
Note  
Speed Dial numbers start with #.  
One Touch numbers start with l.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose the number you  
want to delete.  
e Press OK to choose Send a fax.  
Press OK.  
Press 1 to confirm.  
f Press a or b to choose Phone Book.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose Search.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
h Enter a or b to choose  
Numerical Order.  
Press OK.  
Dialing Access codes and  
credit card numbers  
8
i Press a or b to choose l02.  
Press OK.  
Sometimes you may want to choose from  
several long distance carriers when you  
make a call. Rates may vary depending on  
the time and destination. To take advantage  
of low rates, you can store the access codes  
of long-distance carriers and credit card  
numbers as One Touch and Speed Dial  
numbers. You can store these long dialing  
sequences by dividing them and setting them  
up as separate One Touch and Speed Dial  
numbers in any combination. You can even  
include manual dialing using the dial pad.  
j Press OK to choose Send a fax.  
k Press Black Start or Color Start.  
You will dial ‘555-7000’.  
To temporarily change a number, you can  
substitute part of the number with manual  
dialing using the dial pad. For example, to  
change the number to 555-7001 you could  
press  
(Phone Book), choose Search,  
press 03 and then press 7001 using the dial  
pad.  
Note  
For example, you might have stored ‘555’ on  
If you must wait for another dial tone or  
signal at any point in the dialing sequence,  
create a pause in the number by pressing  
Redial/Pause. Each key press adds a  
3.5-second delay.  
Speed Dial: 03 and ‘7000’ on One Touch: 02.  
You can use them both to dial ‘555-7000’ if  
you press the following keys:  
a Press  
(Phone Book).  
b Press a or b to choose Search.  
Press OK.  
88  
 
Printing Reports  
9
9
c Press a or b to choose  
Fax reports  
9
Report Setting.  
Press OK.  
You need to set up the Transmission  
Verification Report and Journal Period using  
the Menu keys.  
d Press a or b to choose Transmission.  
e Press d or c to choose On, On+Image,  
Off, Off+Image, Off2or  
Off2+Image.  
Transmission Verification  
Report  
9
Press OK.  
You can use the Transmission Verification  
Report as proof that you sent a fax. This  
report lists the time and date of transmission  
and whether the transmission was successful  
(OK). If you choose Onor On+Image, the  
report will print for every fax you send.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Fax Journal (activity report)  
9
You can set the machine to print a journal at  
specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24  
hours, 2 or 7 days). If you set the interval to  
Off, you can still print the report by following  
The factory setting is Every 50 Faxes.  
If you send a lot of faxes to the same place,  
you may need more than the job number to  
know which faxes you must send again.  
Choosing On+Imageor Off+Imagewill print  
a section of the fax's first page on the report  
to help you remember.  
a Press Menu.  
9
When the Transmission Verification Report is  
set to Offor Off+Image, the Report will  
print if there is a transmission error and also if  
the fax you received does not match the fax  
that was sent to you (for example, if you  
received a color fax in black & white, or your  
fax printout is a reduced size.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Report Setting.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Journal Period.  
When the Transmission Verification Report is  
set to Off2or Off2+Image, the Report will  
only print if there is a transmission error and  
the fax wasn't sent.  
Note  
If you choose On+Image, Off+Imageor  
Off2+Image, the image will only appear  
on the Transmission Verification Report if  
Real Time Transmission is set to Off. (See  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
89  
       
Chapter 9  
e Press d or c to choose an interval.  
Press OK.  
Reports  
9
(If you choose 7 days, the LCD will ask  
you to choose the first day for the 7-day  
countdown.)  
The following reports are available:  
Transmission  
Prints a Transmission Verification Report  
for your last transmission.  
6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days  
The machine will print the report at  
the chosen time and then erase all  
jobs from its memory. If the  
Help List  
A help list showing how to program your  
machine.  
machine's memory becomes full with  
200 jobs before the time you chose  
has passed, the machine will print  
the Journal early and then erase all  
jobs from the memory. If you want an  
extra report before it is due to print,  
you can print it without erasing the  
jobs from the memory.  
Quick Dial  
Lists names and numbers stored in the  
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in  
alphabetical or numerical order.  
Fax Journal  
Lists information about the last incoming  
and outgoing faxes. (TX: Transmit.)  
(RX: Receive.)  
Every 50 Faxes  
The machine will print the Journal  
when the machine has stored 50  
jobs.  
User Settings  
Lists your settings.  
f Enter the time to start printing in 24-hour  
Network Config  
Lists your Network settings.  
Caller ID hist.  
format.  
Press OK.  
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)  
Lists the available Caller ID information  
about the last 30 received faxes and  
telephone calls.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
How to print a report  
9
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Print Reports.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the report you  
want.  
Press OK.  
d (Quick Dial only) Press a or b to choose  
Alphabetical Orderor  
Numerical Order.  
Press OK.  
e Press Black Start.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
90  
           
Polling  
10  
10  
Sequential polling  
(Black & White only)  
Polling overview  
10  
10  
Polling lets you set up your machine so other  
people can receive faxes from you, but they  
pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody  
else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,  
so you pay for the call. The polling feature  
needs to be set up on both machines for this  
Sequential polling lets you request  
documents from several fax machines in one  
operation. Afterwards, a Sequential Polling  
Report will be printed.  
to work. Not all fax machines support polling.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press a or b to choose Polling RX.  
Polling receive  
10  
c Press d or c to choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
Polling receive lets you call another fax  
machine to receive a fax.  
d Press a or b to choose Broadcasting.  
Press OK.  
Setup to receive polling  
10  
e Do one of the following:  
Press a or b to choose Add Number  
and enter the number using a dial  
pad.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press a or b to choose Polling RX.  
Press OK.  
Press a or b to choose Phone Book  
and OK. Press a or b to choose  
Alphabetical Orderor  
c Press d or c to choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
10  
Numerical Orderand OK. Press  
a or b to select a number and OK.  
d Enter the fax number you are polling.  
e Press Black Start or Color Start.  
The LCD shows Dialing.  
Note  
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.  
Speed Dial locations begin with #.  
f After you have entered all the fax  
numbers by repeating step e, press  
a or b to choose Complete.  
Press OK.  
g Press Black Start.  
The machine polls each number or  
Group number in turn for a document.  
Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing  
to cancel the polling process.  
To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,  
91  
           
Chapter 10  
Polled transmit  
(Black & White only)  
10  
Polled transmit lets you set up your machine  
to wait with a document so another fax  
machine can call and retrieve it.  
The document will be stored and can be  
retrieved by any other fax machine until you  
delete it from the memory. (See Checking  
Set up for polled transmit  
10  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Load your document.  
c Press a or b to choose Polled TX.  
d Press d or c to choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose any settings you  
want to change.  
Press OK.  
After each setting is accepted, you can  
continue to change more settings.  
f Press Black Start.  
g If you are using the scanner glass, the  
LCD will prompt you to choose one of  
the following options.  
Press 1 to send another page.  
Go to h.  
Press 2 or Black Start to send the  
document.  
h Place the next page on the scanner  
glass, press OK. Repeat g and h for  
each additional page.  
Your machine will automatically send  
the fax.  
92  
       
Section III  
Copy  
III  
 
Making copies  
11  
11  
When the option you want is highlighted,  
press OK.  
How to copy  
11  
Note  
Entering Copy mode  
11  
• The default setting is Fax mode. You can  
change the amount of time that the  
machine stays in Copy mode after the last  
copy operation. (See Mode Timer  
When you want to make a copy, press  
(Copy) to illuminate it in blue.  
Book Copyand Watermark Copy  
features are supported by technology  
from Reallusion, Inc.  
The LCD shows:  
Making a single copy  
11  
1
01  
a Press  
(Copy).  
Quality  
Normal  
100%  
Enlarge/Reduce  
Ratio:  
b Load your document.  
Tray Select  
Tray#1  
COPY  
Copy  
Press Start  
c Press Black Start or Color Start.  
1
No. of Copies  
You can enter the number of copies you want  
by using the dial pad.  
Making multiple copies  
11  
Press a or b to scroll through the Copy key  
options.  
You can make up to 99 copies.  
Quality(See page 95.)  
a Press  
(Copy).  
Enlarge/Reduce(See page 95.)  
Tray Select(See page 100.)  
Paper Type(See page 99.)  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
Note  
Paper Size(See page 99.)  
Brightness(See page 99.)  
Contrast(See page 99.)  
Stack/Sort(See page 98.)  
Page Layout(See page 96.)  
Skew Adjustment(See page 100.)  
Book Copy(See page 100.)  
Watermark Copy(See page 101.)  
Set New Default(See page 102.)  
Factory Reset(See page 102.)  
To sort the copies, press a or b to choose  
Stack/Sort. (See Sorting copies using  
Stop copying  
11  
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.  
94  
           
Making copies  
a Press  
(Copy).  
Copy settings  
11  
b Load your document.  
You can change the copy settings temporarily  
for the next copy.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Quality.  
These settings are temporary, and the  
machine returns to its default settings  
1 minute after copying, unless you have set  
the Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less. (See  
e Press d or c to choose Fast, Normalor  
Best.  
Press OK.  
If you have finished choosing settings, press  
Black Start or Color Start.  
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
If you want to choose more settings, press  
a or b.  
Note  
Enlarging or reducing the  
image copied  
You can save some of the settings that  
you use most often by setting them as  
default. These settings will stay until you  
change them again. (See Setting your  
11  
You can choose an enlargement or reduction  
ratio. If you choose Fit to Page, your  
machine will adjust the size automatically to  
the paper size you set.  
Changing copy quality  
11  
a Press  
(Copy).  
You can choose from a range of quality. The  
factory setting is Normal.  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
Fast  
Fast copy speed and lowest amount of ink  
used. Use to save time printing  
documents to be proof-read, large  
documents or many copies.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Enlarge/Reduce.  
11  
e Press d or c to choose Enlarge,  
Reduce, Fit to Pageor  
Custom(25-400%).  
Normal  
Normal is the recommended mode for  
ordinary printouts. This produces good  
copy quality with good copy speed.  
Press OK.  
f Do one of the following:  
Best  
If you chose Enlargeor Reduce,  
press OK and press d or c to choose  
the enlargement or reduction ratio  
you want.  
Use best mode to copy precise images  
such as photographs. This provides the  
highest resolution and slowest speed.  
If you chose Custom(25-400%),  
press OK and then enter an  
enlargement or reduction ratio from  
25%to 400%.  
If you chose 100%or Fit to Page,  
go to step g.  
95  
         
Chapter 11  
Making N in 1 copies or a  
poster (page layout)  
198% 4"x6"iA4  
186% 4"x6"iLTR  
142% LTRiLGR  
104% EXEiLTR  
97% LTRiA4  
11  
The N in 1 copy feature can help you save  
paper by letting you copy two or four pages  
onto one printed page.  
The 1 to 2 feature copies one Ledger or A3  
size page onto two Letter or A4 size pages. If  
you use this setting, use the scanner glass.  
93% A4iLTR  
83% LGLiA4  
78% LGLiLTR  
64% LGRiLTR  
46% LTRi4"x6"  
Fit to Page  
Custom(25-400%)  
You can also produce a poster. When you  
use the poster feature your machine divides  
your document into sections, then enlarges  
the sections so you can assemble them into a  
poster. If you want to print a poster, use the  
scanner glass.  
g If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Important  
Please make sure paper size is set to  
Letter, Ledger, A4 or A3.  
Note  
You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce  
setting with the N in 1 and Poster features.  
Page LayoutOptions are not available  
with Enlarge/Reduce.  
If you are producing multiple color copies,  
N in 1 copy is not available.  
Fit to Pageoptions is not available  
with Page Layout, Book Copyand  
Watermark Copy.  
(P)means Portrait and (L)means  
Landscape.  
Fit to Pagedoes not work properly  
when the document on the scanner glass  
is skewed more than 3 degrees. Using the  
document guidelines on the left and top,  
place your document in the upper left  
hand corner, with the document face down  
on the scanner glass.  
You can only make one poster copy at a  
time.  
Note  
Skew Adjustmentis not available with  
the Posterand 1 to 2options.  
Fit to Pageis not available for a Legal  
a Press  
(Copy).  
size document.  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Page Layout.  
96  
     
Making copies  
e Press d or c to choose Off(1 in 1),  
2 in 1 (P), 2 in 1 (L),  
4 in 1 (P), 4 in 1 (L), 1 to 2,  
Poster(2x2)or Poster(3x3).  
Press OK.  
If you are copying from the ADF, insert the  
document face up in the direction shown  
below:  
2 in 1 (P)  
If you chose 2 in 1or  
Poster(2x2)with Ledger or A3, go to  
step f to choose the paper size of your  
document.  
2 in 1 (L)  
If you choose another setting, go to  
step g.  
f Do one of the following:  
1 to 2  
If you chose 2 in 1 (P)or  
2 in 1 (L), press b to choose  
Layout Format. Press d or c to  
choose LGRx2 i LGRx1,  
4 in 1 (P)  
LTRx2 i LGRx1, A3x2 i A3x1or  
A4x2 i A3x1.  
If you chose Poster(2x2), press b  
to choose Layout Format. Press  
d or c to choose LGRx1 i LGRx4,  
LTRx1 i LGRx4, A3x1 i A3x4or  
A4x1 i A3x4.  
4 in 1 (L)  
g If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start to scan the page.  
If you are making a poster or placed the  
document in the ADF, the machine  
scans the pages and starts printing.  
If you are using the scanner glass, go  
to step h.  
11  
h After the machine scans the page,  
press 1 to scan the next page.  
i Place the next page on the scanner  
glass.  
Press OK.  
Repeat steps h and i for each page of  
the layout.  
j After all the pages have been scanned,  
press 2 to finish.  
Note  
If photo paper has been chosen in the  
Paper Type setting for N in 1 copies, the  
machine will print the images as if Plain  
paper had been chosen.  
97  
       
Chapter 11  
If you are copying from the scanner glass,  
place the document face down in the  
direction shown below:  
Sorting copies using the ADF  
11  
You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be  
stacked in the order 123, 123, 123, and so on.  
2 in 1 (P)  
a Press  
(Copy).  
2 in 1 (L)  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Stack/Sort.  
1 to 2  
e Press d or c to choose Sort.  
Press OK.  
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
4 in 1 (P)  
Note  
Page Layoutis not available with Sort.  
4 in 1 (L)  
Poster (2 x 2)  
You can make a poster size copy of a  
photograph.  
Poster (3 x 3)  
You can make a poster size copy of a  
photograph.  
98  
   
Making copies  
Adjusting Brightness and  
Contrast  
Paper Options  
11  
11  
Paper Type  
11  
Brightness  
11  
If you are copying on special paper, set the  
machine for the type of paper you are using to  
get the best print quality.  
You can adjust the copy brightness to make  
copies darker or lighter.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Load your document.  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Paper Type.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Brightness.  
e Press d or c to choose Plain Paper,  
Inkjet Paper, Brother BP71,  
Other Glossyor Transparency.  
Press OK.  
e Press d to make a darker copy or press  
c to make a lighter copy.  
Press OK.  
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Contrast  
11  
Paper Size  
11  
You can adjust the copy contrast to help an  
image look sharper and more vivid.  
If copying on paper other than Letter size, you  
will need to change the paper size setting.  
You can copy only on Ledger, A3, Letter,  
Legal, A4, A5 or Photo 4 in. × 6 in.  
(10 cm × 15 cm) paper.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
11  
b Load your document.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Contrast.  
b Load your document.  
e Press c to increase the contrast or press  
d to decrease the contrast.  
Press OK.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Paper Size.  
e Press d or c to choose Letter, Legal,  
Ledger, A4, A5, A3or 4"x6".  
Press OK.  
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
99  
                   
Chapter 11  
Tray Select  
11  
Note  
You can change the tray that will be used for  
next copy only. To change the default tray  
Skew Adjustmentis not available with  
Poster, 1 to 2, Book Copyand  
Watermark Copy.  
• You cannot use this setting with Ledger,  
A3 or paper that is smaller than  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode.  
b Load your document.  
2.52 in. × 3.58 in. (64 mm × 91 mm).  
• This setting is only available for paper that  
is rectangular or square.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Tray Select.  
• You cannot use this setting with a thick  
document, such as a book.  
e
Press  
Press OK.  
d
or  
c
to choose Tray#1or Tray#2  
.
• Skew Adjustment is only available if the  
document is skewed by less than 3  
degrees.  
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Book Copy  
11  
Skew Adjustment  
11  
Book copy corrects dark borders and skew  
when copying from the scanner glass. Your  
machine can correct the data automatically or  
you can make specific corrections.  
If your copy is scanned skewed, your  
machine can correct the data automatically.  
This setting is only available when using the  
scanner glass.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Load your document.  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press a or b to choose Book Copy.  
e Do one of the following:  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d
Press  
a
or  
b
to choose Skew Adjustment  
.
If you want to correct the data  
yourself, press d or c to choose  
On(Preview).  
e Press d or c to choose Auto(or Off).  
Press OK.  
f
If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or Color Start  
Press OK.  
.
Press Black Start or Color Start  
and go to step f.  
If you want the machine to correct  
the data automatically, press d or c  
to choose Onand go to step g.  
f Adjust the skewed data using # or l.  
Remove the shadows by using a or b.  
g If you have finished making corrections,  
press Black Start or Color Start.  
100  
               
Making copies  
Using media cards or a USB Flash  
memory drive data  
Note  
11  
Book Copyis not available with  
Page Layout  
Skew Adjustmentand  
Watermark Copy  
,
Sort, Fit to Page,  
a Press  
(Copy).  
.
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
Watermark Copy  
11  
d Press a or b to choose  
Watermark Copy.  
Press OK.  
You can place a logo or text into your  
document as a Watermark. You can select  
one of the template watermarks  
(CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFT, or COPY), data  
from your media cards or USB Flash memory  
drive, or scanned data.  
e Press d or c to choose On.  
f Press a or b to choose  
Current Setting.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Watermark Copyis not available with  
Fit to Page, Page Layout,  
Skew Adjustmentand Book Copy.  
g Press a or b to choose Media. Insert a  
media card or USB Flash memory drive.  
h Press OK and then press d or c to  
choose the data you want to use for the  
watermark.  
Using template data  
11  
a Press  
(Copy).  
i Press OK and change any additional  
settings from the options shown on the  
LCD.  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
j If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Watermark Copy.  
Press OK.  
11  
CAUTION  
e Press d or c to choose On.  
DO NOT take out the memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive while Photo Capture  
is blinking to avoid damaging the card, USB  
Flash memory drive or data stored on the  
card.  
f Press a or b to choose  
Current Setting.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose Template.  
Press OK.  
h Change the settings from the options  
shown on the LCD if you need.  
i If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
101  
       
Chapter 11  
Using a scanned paper document as  
your watermark  
Setting your changes as the  
new default  
11  
11  
a Press  
(Copy).  
You can save the copy settings for Quality,  
Enlarge/Reduce, Tray Select,  
Brightness, Contrast, Page Layoutor  
Skew Adjustmentthat you use most often  
by setting them the default settings. These  
b Enter the number of copies you want.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Watermark Copy.  
Press OK.  
settings will stay until you change them again.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
d Press d or c to choose On.  
b Press a or b to choose your new setting.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose  
Current Setting.  
Press OK.  
Repeat this step for each setting you  
want to change.  
f Press a or b to choose Scan. Press OK.  
Then place the page that you want to  
use for the watermark on the scanner  
glass.  
c After changing the last setting, press  
a or b to choose Set New Default.  
Press OK.  
d Press 1 to choose Yes.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
g Press Black Start or Color Start.  
h Take out the watermark document you  
scanned and load the document you  
want to copy.  
Restoring all settings to the  
factory settings  
11  
i Press d or c to change the  
Transparencyof the watermark.  
Press OK.  
You can restore all the settings you have  
changed to the factory settings. These  
j If you do not want to change any  
additional settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
settings will stay until you change them again.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
Note  
b Press a or b to choose  
Factory Reset.  
Press OK.  
You cannot enlarge or reduce the  
scanned watermark.  
c Press 1 to choose Yes.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
102  
         
Making copies  
‘Out of Memory’  
message  
11  
If the Out of Memorymessage appears  
while scanning document, press Stop/Exit to  
cancel or Black Start or Color Start to copy  
the scanned pages.  
You will need to clear some jobs from the  
memory before you can continue.  
To free up extra memory, do the following:  
Turn off Fax Storage. (See Fax Storage  
Print the faxes that are in the memory.  
When you get an Out of Memory  
message, you may be able to make copies if  
you first print incoming faxes in the memory to  
restore the memory to 100%.  
11  
103  
 
Chapter 11  
104  
Section IV  
Walk-up Photo Printing  
IV  
PhotoCapture Center®:  
USB Flash memory drive  
106  
 
®
PhotoCapture Center :  
Printing photos from a memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive  
12  
12  
®
Using a memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive  
PhotoCapture Center  
Operations  
12  
12  
Your Brother machine has media drives  
(slots) for use with popular digital camera  
Printing from a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive  
without a PC  
®
®
media: CompactFlash , Memory Stick ,  
Memory Stick Pro™, SD, SDHC, xD-Picture  
Card™ and USB Flash memory drives.  
12  
Even if your machine is not connected to your  
computer, you can print photos directly from  
digital camera media or a USB Flash memory  
drive. (See Print Images on page 109.)  
CompactFlash®  
Memory Stick®  
Memory Stick Pro™  
Scanning to memory cards or  
USB Flash memory drive  
without a PC  
12  
SD, SDHC  
xD-Picture Card™  
You can scan documents and save them  
directly to a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive. (See Scan to a memory card  
0.87 in. (22 mm)  
or less  
0.43 in. (11 mm)  
or less  
Using PhotoCapture Center®  
from your computer  
USB Flash memory drive  
12  
miniSD™ can be used with a miniSD™  
You can access a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive that is inserted in the front of  
the machine from your computer.  
adapter.  
microSD can be used with a microSD  
adapter.  
®
®
(See PhotoCapture Center for Windows or  
Memory Stick Duo™ can be used with a  
®
Memory Stick Duo™ adapter.  
Remote Setup & PhotoCapture Center for  
®
Macintosh in the Software User's Guide on  
Memory Stick Pro Duo™ can be used with  
the CD-ROM.)  
a Memory Stick Pro Duo™ adapter.  
Memory Stick Micro(M2) can be used with  
a Memory Stick Micro(M2) adapter.  
Adapters are not included with the machine.  
Contact a third party supplier for adapters.  
®
The PhotoCapture Center feature lets you  
print digital photos from your digital camera at  
high resolution to get photo quality printing.  
106  
           
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Please be aware of the following:  
Memory cards or a USB Flash  
memory drive folder structure  
When printing the INDEX or IMAGE, the  
12  
®
PhotoCapture Center will print all the  
To avoid errors, remember the following  
points:  
valid images, even if one or more images  
have been corrupted. The corrupted  
image will not be printed.  
The image file extension must be .JPG  
(Other image file extensions like .JPEG,  
.TIF, .GIF and so on will not be  
recognized).  
(memory card users)  
Your machine is designed to read memory  
cards that have been formatted by a digital  
camera.  
®
Walk-up PhotoCapture Center printing  
must be performed separately from  
When a digital camera formats a memory  
card it creates a special folder into which it  
copies image data. If you need to modify  
the image data stored on a memory card  
with your PC, we recommend that you do  
not modify the folder structure created by  
the digital camera. When saving new or  
modified image files to the memory card  
we also recommend you use the same  
folder your digital camera uses. If the data  
is not saved to the same folder, the  
machine may not be able to read the file or  
print the image.  
®
PhotoCapture Center operations using  
the PC. (Simultaneous operation is not  
available.)  
IBM Microdrive™ is not compatible with  
the machine.  
The machine can read up to 999 files on a  
memory card or USB Flash memory drive.  
®
CompactFlash Type II is not supported.  
This product supports xD-Picture Card™  
Type M / Type H.  
The DPOF file on the memory cards must  
be in a valid DPOF format. (See DPOF  
(USB Flash memory drive users)  
This machine supports USB Flash  
memory drives that has been formatted by  
®
Windows .  
12  
107  
 
Chapter 12  
Photo Capture key lights:  
Getting started  
12  
Firmly put a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive into the proper slot.  
Photo Capture light is on, the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive is  
properly inserted.  
1
2 3 4 5  
Photo Capture light is off, the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive is not  
properly inserted.  
1
USB Flash memory drive  
2
3
CompactFlash®  
SD, SDHC  
Photo Capture light is blinking, memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive is being  
read or written to.  
4
5
Memory Stick®, Memory Stick Pro™  
xD-Picture Card™  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove  
the media from the media drive (slot) or  
USB direct interface while the machine is  
reading or writing to the media (the  
Photo Capture key is blinking). You will  
lose your data or damage the card.  
The USB direct interface supports only a  
USB Flash memory drive, a PictBridge  
compatible camera, or a digital camera that  
uses the USB mass storage standard. Any  
other USB devices are not supported.  
The machine can only read one device at a  
time so do not put more than one device in  
the machine at a time.  
108  
 
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Entering PhotoCapture mode  
12  
Print Images  
12  
After you insert the memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive, press the  
View Photo(s)  
12  
(Photo Capture) key to illuminate it in  
blue and display the PhotoCapture options on  
the LCD.  
You can preview your photos on the LCD  
before you print them. If your photos are large  
files there may be a delay before each photo  
is displayed on the LCD.  
The LCD shows:  
View Photo(s)  
View pphotooss on the LCD  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
Print IIndex  
and select tthe immages  
Print PPhotos  
you want to  
Enhance Photos  
print.  
Search bby Date  
Print AAll Photos  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
PHOTO  
Select & Press  
OK  
b Press a or b to choose  
View Photo(s).  
Press OK.  
Press a or b to scroll through the  
PhotoCapture key options.  
View Photo(s)(See page 109.)  
Print Index(See page 110.)  
Print Photos(See page 110.)  
Enhance Photos(See page 111.)  
Search by Date(See page 114.)  
c Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Note  
Instead of scrolling through your photos,  
you can use the dial pad to enter the  
number of the image from the index page.  
Print All Photos(See page 115.)  
Slide show(See page 115.)  
Trimming(See page 116.)  
d Press a or b to increase or decrease the  
number of copies.  
Note  
e Repeat step c and step d until you  
If your digital camera supports DPOF  
printing, see DPOF printing on page 116.  
have chosen all the photos.  
12  
Note  
When the option you want is highlighted,  
press OK.  
Press Clear/Back to go back to the  
previous level.  
f After you have chosen all the photos, do  
one of the following:  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
109  
             
Chapter 12  
d Do one of the following:  
Press or to choose Paper Type  
and press  
paper you are using, Plain Paper  
Print Index (Thumbnails)  
12  
a
b
d
,
,
®
or  
c
to choose the type of  
The PhotoCapture Center assigns numbers  
for images (such as No.1, No.2, No.3, and so  
on).  
Inkjet Paper  
,
.
Brother BP71or  
Other Glossy  
Press OK.  
Press a or b to choose Paper Size  
and press d or c to choose the paper  
size you are using, Letteror A4.  
Press OK.  
®
The PhotoCapture Center does not  
If you do not want to change the  
paper settings, go to e.  
recognize any other numbers or file names  
that your digital camera or computer has  
used to identify the pictures. You can print a  
thumbnail page. This will show all the pictures  
on the memory card or USB Flash memory  
drive.  
e Press Color Start to print.  
Print Photos  
12  
Before you can print an individual image, you  
have to know the image number.  
Note  
Only file names that are 8 characters or  
less will be printed correctly on the index  
sheet.  
a
Make sure you have put a memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive in the proper slot.  
Press (Photo Capture).  
a Make sure you have put the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
b Print the Index. (See Print Index  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
c Press a or b to choose Print Photos.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Print Index.  
Press OK.  
d Enter the image number that you want to  
print from the Index page (Thumbnails).  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Layout Format. Press d or c to  
choose 6 Images/Lineor  
5 Images/Line.  
e
Repeat step  
the image numbers that you want to print.  
until you have entered all  
Press OK.  
Note  
You can enter multiple numbers at one time  
by using the key for a comma or the key  
for a hyphen. For example, Enter  
to print images No.1, No.3 and No.6.  
Enter to print images No.1 to No.5.  
l
#
1
,
l
,
3
,
l,  
6
1
,
#,  
5
5 Images/Line 6 Images/Line  
• You can enter up to 12 characters  
(including commas) for the image  
numbers you want to print.  
Print time for 5 images/Line will be  
slower than 6 images/Line, but the  
quality is better.  
110  
           
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
f After you have chosen all the image  
Enhance Photos  
12  
numbers, press OK again.  
You can edit and add effects to your photos  
and view them on the LCD before printing.  
g Enter the number of copies you want  
using the dial pad.  
Note  
h Do one of the following:  
• After adding each effect, you can enlarge  
the view of the image by pressing l. To go  
back to the original size, press l again.  
Change the print settings. (See  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
• The Enhance Photos feature is supported  
by technology from Reallusion,  
Inc.  
Auto Correct  
12  
Auto Correct is available for most photos. The  
machine decides the suitable effect for your  
photo.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Enhance Photos.  
Press OK.  
c Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Auto Correct.  
Press OK.  
12  
e Press OK and a or b to increase or  
decrease the number of copies.  
f Do one of the following.  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
Note  
If Remove Red-Eyeappears on the LCD,  
press # to remove red-eye from your  
photo.  
111  
     
Chapter 12  
Enhance Skin-Tone  
12  
Enhance Scenery  
12  
Enhance Skin-Tone is best used for adjusting  
portrait photographs. It detects human skin  
color in your photos and adjusts the image.  
Enhance Scenery is best used for adjusting  
landscape photographs. It highlights green  
and blue areas in your photo, so that the  
landscape looks more sharp and vivid.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
a Make sure you have put the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Enhance Photos.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Enhance Photos.  
Press OK.  
c Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Press OK.  
c Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Enhance Skin-Tone.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Enhance Scenery.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Note  
You can also adjust the effect level  
manually, by pressing a or b.  
You can also adjust the effect level  
manually, by pressing a or b.  
e Press OK and a or b to increase or  
decrease the number of copies.  
e Press OK and a or b to increase or  
decrease the number of copies.  
f Do one of the following.  
f Do one of the following.  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
112  
   
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Remove Red-Eye  
12  
Monochrome  
12  
The machine detects eyes in your photos and  
will remove red-eye from your photo.  
You can convert your photo to black & white.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
Note  
There are some cases when red-eye may  
not be removed.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
• When the face is too small.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Enhance Photos.  
Press OK.  
• When the face is turned too far up,  
down, left or right.  
c Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Press OK.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
d Press a or b to choose Monochrome.  
Press OK.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Enhance Photos.  
Press OK.  
e Press OK and a or b to increase or  
decrease the number of copies.  
f Do one of the following.  
c Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Press OK.  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
d Press a or b to choose  
Remove Red-Eye.  
Press OK.  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
When Remove Red-Eyeis  
successful, the photo after effect is  
shown. The adjusted part is shown in  
a red frame.  
When Remove Red-Eyeis  
unsuccessful,  
Unable to Detect.is shown.  
12  
Press 3 to go back to the previous  
level.  
Note  
Press # to try Remove Red-Eyeonce  
again.  
e Press OK and a or b to increase or  
decrease the number of copies.  
f Do one of the following.  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
113  
   
Chapter 12  
Sepia  
12  
Search by Date  
12  
You can convert the color of your photo to  
sepia.  
You can find your photos based on date.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Search by Date.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Enhance Photos.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose the date that you  
want to search from.  
c Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Sepia.  
Press OK.  
d Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Note  
e Press OK and a or b to increase or  
decrease the number of copies.  
You can view photos with other dates by  
pressing d or c continuously. Press d to  
view an older photo and c to view a newer  
photo.  
f Do one of the following.  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
e Press a or b to increase or decrease the  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
number of copies.  
f Repeat step d and step e until you  
have chosen all your photos.  
g After you have chosen all your photos,  
do one of the following:  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
114  
         
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Print All Photos  
12  
Slide show  
12  
You can print all the photos on your memory  
card.  
You can view all your photos on the LCD  
using Slide show. You can also choose a  
photo during the operation.  
Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
a
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Print All Photos.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Slide show.  
Press OK.  
c Enter the number of copies you want  
c Press Stop/Exit to finish Slide show.  
using the dial pad.  
Printing a photo during a Slide show  
12  
d Do one of the following:  
Change the print settings. (See  
a Press OK to stop at one image while  
Slide show is operating.  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
b Press a or b to increase or decrease the  
number of copies.  
c Do one of the following:  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
12  
115  
       
Chapter 12  
Trimming  
12  
DPOF printing  
12  
You can trim your photo and print a part of the  
image.  
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.  
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon  
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, Fuji Photo  
Film Co. Ltd., Matsushita Electric Industrial  
Co. Ltd. and Sony Corporation) created this  
standard to make it easier to print images  
from a digital camera.  
Note  
If your photo is very small or an irregular  
shape you may not be able to trim the  
photo. The LCD will display  
Image Too Small.or  
If your digital camera supports DPOF  
printing, you will be able to choose on the  
digital camera display the images and  
number of copies you want to print.  
Image Too Long.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
®
When the memory card (CompactFlash ,  
®
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
Memory Stick , Memory Stick Pro™, SD,  
SDHC or xD-Picture Card™) with DPOF  
information is put into your machine, you can  
print the chosen image easily.  
b Press a or b to choose Trimming.  
Press OK.  
c Press d or c to choose your photo.  
Press OK.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
in the proper slot.  
Press  
(Photo Capture). The  
d Adjust the red frame on your photo.  
The part inside of the red frame will be  
printed.  
machine will ask you if you want to use  
DPOF setting.  
Press l or # to enlarge or reduce the  
b Press 1 to choose Yes.  
c Do one of the following:  
frame size.  
Press each arrow key to move the  
Change the print settings. (See  
position of the frame.  
Press 0 to rotate the frame.  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
Press OK when you have finished  
the frame setting.  
Note  
e Press a or b to increase or decrease the  
An Invalid DPOF File error can occur if the  
number of copies.  
print order that was created on the camera  
has been corrupted. Delete and recreate  
the print order using your camera to  
correct this problem. For instructions on  
how to delete or recreate the print order,  
refer to your camera manufacturer's  
support website or accompanying  
documentation.  
f Do one of the following:  
Press OK and change the print  
settings. (See page 117.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
116  
       
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
®
PhotoCapture Center print settings  
12  
You can change the print settings temporarily for the next printing.  
These settings are temporary, and the machine returns to its default settings 3 minutes after  
printing, unless you have set the Mode Timer to 2 minutes or less. (See Mode Timer on page 26.)  
Note  
You can save the print settings you use most often by setting them as default. (See Setting  
0001  
Print Setting  
Print Quality  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
Print Size  
1
Photo  
Other Glossy  
x
4" 6"  
Max. Size  
0
Brightness  
Print  
Press Start  
PHOTO  
1
No. of prints  
(For View Photo(s), Search by Date, Slide Show)  
You can see the total number of photos that will be printed.  
(For Print All Photos, Print Photos, Enhance Photos, Trimming)  
You can see the number of copies of each photo that will be printed.  
(For DPOF printing) This does not appear.  
Menu Selections  
Options 1  
Options 2  
Page  
Print Quality  
Normal/Photo  
(Does not appear for  
DPOF printing)  
Paper Type  
Plain Paper/Inkjet Paper/  
Brother BP71/Other Glossy  
Paper Size  
4"x 6"/5"x 7"/Letter/  
Ledger/A4/A3  
(When A4 or Letter is chosen)  
12  
3"x 4"/3.5"x 5"/  
4"x 6"/ 5"x 7"/  
6"x 8"/Max. Size  
Brightness  
Light  
Dark  
(Does not appear  
when  
Enhance Photosis  
chosen.)  
Contrast  
(Does not appear  
when  
Enhance Photosis  
chosen.)  
117  
   
Chapter 12  
Menu Selections  
Options 1  
Options 2  
Page  
True2Life  
On/Off  
White Balance  
(Does not appear  
when  
Sharpness  
Enhance Photosis  
chosen.)  
Color Density  
Exit  
Cropping  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
Borderless  
Print Date  
(Does not appear when  
DPOF Print is chosen.)  
Set New Default Yes/No  
Factory Reset  
Yes/No  
Paper and print size  
12  
Print Quality  
12  
a Press a or b to choose Paper Size.  
a Press a or b to choose  
Print Quality.  
b Press d or c to choose the paper size  
you are using, 4"x 6", 5"x 7",  
Letter, Ledger, A4or A3.  
Press OK.  
b Press d or c to choose Normalor  
Photo.  
Press OK.  
c If you chose Letter or A4, press d or c to  
choose the Print Size.  
c If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
Example: Printed Position for Letter paper  
1
2
3
3"x 4"  
3.5"x 5"  
4"x 6"  
Paper options  
12  
Paper Type  
12  
a Press a or b to choose Paper Type.  
b Press d or c to choose the paper type  
you are using, Plain Paper,  
Inkjet Paper, Brother BP71or  
Other Glossy.  
4
5
6
Max. Size  
5"x 7"  
6"x 8"  
Press OK.  
c If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
d If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
118  
             
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
c Press a or b to choose  
White Balance, Sharpnessor  
Color Density.  
Adjusting Brightness,  
Contrast and Color  
12  
d Press d or c to adjust the degree of the  
Brightness  
12  
setting.  
Press OK.  
a Press a or b to choose Brightness.  
e Do one of the following:  
b Press d to make a darker print or press  
c to make a lighter print.  
Press OK.  
If you want to customize another  
color enhancement, press a or b to  
choose another option.  
c If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
If you want to change other settings,  
press a or b to choose Exit, and  
then press OK.  
Contrast  
12  
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
You can choose the contrast setting. More  
contrast will make an image look sharper and  
more vivid.  
Note  
White Balance  
a Press a or b to choose Contrast.  
This setting adjusts the hue of the white  
areas of an image. Lighting, camera  
settings and other influences will effect the  
appearance of white. The white areas of a  
picture may be slightly pink, yellow or  
some other color. By using this setting,  
you can correct that effect and bring the  
white areas back to pure white.  
b Press c to increase the contrast or press  
d to decrease the contrast.  
Press OK.  
c If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
®
Color Enhancement (True2Life )  
12  
Sharpness  
You can turn on the color  
This setting enhances the detail of an  
image, similar to adjusting the fine focus  
on a camera. If the image is not in true  
focus and you cannot see the fine details  
of the picture, then adjust the sharpness.  
®
enhancement(True2Life ) feature to print  
more vivid images. Printing time will be  
slower.  
12  
a Press a or b to choose True2Life.  
Press OK.  
Color Density  
This setting adjusts the total amount of  
color in the image. You can increase or  
decrease the amount of color in an image  
to improve a washed out or weak picture.  
b Do one of the following:  
If you want to customize the White  
Balance, Sharpness or Color  
Density, press d or c to choose On,  
and then go to step c.  
If you do not want to customize,  
press d or c to choose Off.  
Press OK and then go to step f.  
119  
                 
Chapter 12  
Cropping  
12  
Borderless printing  
12  
If your photo is too long or wide to fit the  
available space on your chosen layout, part  
of the image will automatically be cropped.  
This feature expands the printable area to the  
edges of the paper. Printing time will be  
slightly slower.  
The factory setting is On. If you want to print  
the whole image, turn this setting to Off.  
a Press a or b to choose Borderless.  
b Press d or c to choose Off(or On).  
Press OK.  
a Press a or b to choose Cropping.  
b Press d or c to choose Off(or On).  
Press OK.  
c If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
c If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
Print Date  
12  
Cropping: On  
12  
You can print the date if it is already in the  
data on your photo. The date will be printed  
on the lower right corner. If the data doesn’t  
have the date information, you cannot use  
this function.  
a Press a or b to choose Print Date.  
Cropping: Off  
12  
b Press d or c to choose On(or Off).  
Press OK.  
c If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
Note  
The DPOF setting on your camera must  
be turned on to use the Print Date feature.  
120  
           
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Setting your changes as the  
new default  
Scan to a memory card  
or USB Flash memory  
drive  
12  
You can save the print settings you use most  
often by setting them as the default settings.  
These settings will stay until you change  
them again.  
12  
Entering Scan mode  
12  
a Press a or b to choose your new setting.  
Press OK.  
When you want to scan to a memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive, press  
Repeat this step for each setting you  
want to change.  
(Scan).  
The LCD shows:  
b After changing the last setting, press  
a or b to choose Set New Default.  
Press OK.  
Scan to EE-mail  
Scan a ddocumeent dirrectly  
Scan to Image  
to a media ccard oor USB  
Scan to OCR  
flash meemory.  
Scan to File  
Scan to Media  
c Press 1 to choose Yes.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
SCAN  
Select & Press  
OK  
Press a or b to choose Scan to Media.  
Press OK.  
Restoring all settings to the  
factory settings  
12  
If you are not connected to your computer  
only the Scan to Media selection will appear  
on the LCD.  
You can restore all the settings you have  
changed to the factory settings. These  
settings will stay until you change them again.  
®
®
(See Scanning for Windows or Macintosh  
in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM  
for details about the other menu options.)  
a Press a or b to choose  
Factory Reset.  
Press OK.  
How to scan to a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive  
b Press 1 to choose Yes.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
12  
12  
You can scan black & white and color  
documents into a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive. Black & white documents will  
be stored in PDF (*.PDF) or TIFF file formats  
(*.TIF). Color documents may be stored in  
PDF (*.PDF) or JPEG (*.JPG) file formats.  
The factory setting is Color 150 dpiand  
the default file format is PDF. File names  
default to the current date that you set using  
the control panel keys. (For details, see Quick  
Setup Guide.) For example, the fifth image  
scanned on July 1, 2009 would be named  
07010905.PDF. You can change the color  
and quality.  
121  
               
Chapter 12  
f Press d or c to choose  
Color 150 dpi, Color 300 dpi,  
Color 600 dpi, B/W 200x100 dpi  
or B/W 200 dpi.  
Quality  
Selectable File  
Format  
Color 150 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
JPEG/ PDF  
JPEG/ PDF  
JPEG/ PDF  
Press OK.  
g Do one of the following.  
B/W 200x100 dpi TIFF/ PDF  
To change the file type, go to step h.  
B/W 200 dpi  
TIFF/ PDF  
Press Black Start or Color Start to  
start scanning without changing  
additional settings.  
®
a Insert a CompactFlash , Memory  
®
Stick , Memory Stick Pro™, SD, SDHC,  
xD-Picture Card™ or USB Flash  
memory drive into your machine.  
h Press a or b to choose File Type.  
Press d or c to choose JPEG, PDFor  
TIFF.  
Press OK.  
CAUTION  
DO NOT take out the memory card while  
Photo Capture is blinking to avoid damaging  
the card or data stored on the card.  
Note  
• If you chose color in the resolution setting,  
you cannot choose TIFF.  
• If you chose black & white in the resolution  
setting, you cannot choose JPEG.  
Load your document.  
b
i Do one of the following.  
c Press  
(Scan).  
To change the file name, go to  
step j.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Scan to Media.  
Press OK.  
Press Black Start or Color Start to  
start scanning without changing  
additional settings.  
e Do one of the following.  
To change the quality, press a or b to  
choose Quality.  
j The file name is set automatically  
however, you can set a name of your  
choice using the dial pad. Press a or b to  
choose File Name. Enter the new  
You can only change the first 6 digits.  
Press OK.  
Go to step f.  
Press Black Start or Color Start to  
start scanning without changing  
additional settings.  
Note  
Note  
If you are using the scanner glass of the  
machine you can change the glass scan  
size.  
Press Clear/Back to delete the current  
name.  
Press a or b to choose Glass ScanSize  
and d or c to choose Letter, Legal,  
Ledger, A3or A4.  
k Press Black Start or Color Start.  
122  
     
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Glass Scan Size  
12  
How to set a new default  
12  
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3 or A4 size  
document, you need to change the  
Glass ScanSizesetting. The default  
setting is Letter.  
You can set your own default setting.  
a Press  
(Scan).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Scan to Media.  
Press OK.  
a Press  
(Scan).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Scan to Media.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Set New Default. Press 1 to choose  
Yes.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Glass ScanSize.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press d or c to choose Letter, Legal,  
Ledger, A3or A4.  
How to reset factory setting  
12  
Press OK.  
You can restore the factory settings.  
Note  
a Press  
(Scan).  
• You can save the setting you use most  
often by setting it as the default. (See  
b Press a or b to choose  
Scan to Media.  
Press OK.  
• This setting is only available for scanning  
documents from the scanner glass.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Factory Reset. Press 1 to choose  
Yes.  
How to change the file name  
12  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
You can change the file name.  
a Press  
(Scan).  
12  
b Press a or b to choose  
Scan to Media.  
c Press a or b to choose File Name.  
d Enter the new name using the dial pad.  
You can only change the first 6 digits.  
123  
       
Chapter 12  
Understanding the  
Error Messages  
12  
Once you are familiar with the types of errors  
that can occur while you are using  
®
PhotoCapture Center , you can easily  
identify and troubleshoot any problems.  
Hub is Unusable.  
This message will appear if a Hub or USB  
Flash memory drive with a Hub has been  
put into the USB direct interface.  
Media Error  
This message will appear if you put in a  
memory card that is either bad or not  
formatted, or when there is a problem with  
the media drive. To clear this error, take  
out the memory card.  
No File  
This message will appear if you try to  
access a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive in the drive (slot) that does  
not contain a .JPG file.  
Out of Memory  
This message will appear if you are  
working with images that are too large for  
the machine's memory. This message will  
also appear when a memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive you are using does  
not have enough space available for the  
scanned document.  
Media is Full.  
This message will appear if you are trying  
to save more than 999 files in a memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive.  
Unusable Device  
This message will appear if a USB device  
or USB Flash memory drive that is not  
supported has been connected to the USB  
direct interface. For more information, visit  
message will also appear if you connect a  
broken device to the USB direct interface.  
124  
 
Printing photos from a camera  
13  
13  
Printing photos  
directly from a  
PictBridge camera  
Camera Menu Options  
Selections  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Layout  
Ledger, Letter, A3, A4, 4"×6",  
Printer Settings (Default  
setting) 2  
13  
Plain Paper, Glossy Paper,  
Inkjet Paper, Printer Settings  
(Default setting) 2  
Borderless: On, Borderless:  
Off, Printer Settings (Default  
Your Brother machine supports the  
PictBridge standard, allowing you to connect  
to and print photos directly from any  
PictBridge compatible digital camera.  
setting) 2  
DPOF setting 1  
Print Quality  
-
Normal, Fine, Printer Settings  
(Default setting) 2  
If your camera is using the USB Mass  
Storage standard, you can also print photos  
from a digital camera without PictBridge.(See  
Color  
Enhancement  
On, Off, Printer Settings  
(Default setting) 2  
Print Date  
On, Off, Printer Settings  
(Default setting) 2  
1
2
See DPOF printing on page 126 for more details.  
PictBridge requirements  
13  
If your camera is set to use the Printer Settings  
(Default setting), the machine will print your photo  
using the following settings.  
To avoid errors, remember the following  
points:  
The machine and the digital camera must  
Settings  
Options  
4"×6"  
be connected using a suitable USB cable.  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Layout  
The image file extension must be .JPG  
(other image file extensions like .JPEG,  
.TIF, .GIF and so on will not be  
recognized).  
Glossy Paper  
Borderless: On  
Fine  
Print Quality  
Color Enhancement  
Print Date  
Off  
®
13  
PhotoCapture Center operations are not  
Off  
available when using the PictBridge  
feature.  
When your camera does not have any  
menu selections, this setting is also used.  
Setting your digital camera  
13  
The names and availability of each setting  
depends on the specification of your  
camera.  
Make sure your camera is in PictBridge  
mode. The following PictBridge settings may  
be available from the LCD of your PictBridge  
compatible camera.  
Please refer to the documentation supplied  
with your camera for more detailed  
information on changing PictBridge settings.  
Depending on your camera some of these  
settings may not be available.  
125  
             
Chapter 13  
Printing Images  
13  
DPOF printing  
13  
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.  
Note  
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon  
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, Fuji Photo  
Film Co. Ltd., Matsushita Electric Industrial  
Co. Ltd. and Sony Corporation) created this  
standard to make it easier to print images  
from a digital camera.  
Remove any memory cards or USB Flash  
memory drive from the machine before  
connecting a digital camera.  
a Make sure that your camera is turned  
off. Connect your camera to the USB  
direct interface (1) on the machine using  
the USB cable.  
If your digital camera supports DPOF  
printing, you will be able to choose on the  
digital camera display the images and  
number of copies you want to print.  
Note  
An Invalid DPOF File error can occur if the  
print order that was created on the camera  
has been corrupted. Delete and recreate  
the print order using your camera to  
correct this problem. For instructions on  
how to delete or recreate the print order,  
refer to your camera manufacturer's  
support website or accompanying  
documentation.  
1
1
USB direct interface  
b Turn on the camera.  
When the machine has recognized the  
camera, the LCD shows  
Camera Connected.  
c Choose the photo you want to print  
following the instructions from your  
camera.  
When the machine starts printing a  
photo, the LCD will show Printing.  
WARNING  
To prevent damage to your machine, do not  
connect any device other than a digital  
camera or USB Flash memory drive to the  
USB direct interface.  
126  
     
Printing photos from a camera  
Printing Images  
13  
Printing photos  
directly from a digital  
camera (without  
PictBridge)  
Note  
Remove any memory cards or USB Flash  
memory drive from the machine before  
connecting a digital camera.  
13  
If your camera is using the USB Mass  
Storage standard, you can connect your  
camera in storage mode. This enables you to  
print photos from your camera.  
a Make sure that your camera is turned  
off. Connect your camera to the USB  
direct interface (1) on the machine using  
the USB cable.  
(If you would like to print photos in PictBridge  
Note  
The name, availability and operation differ  
among digital cameras. Please refer to the  
documentation supplied with your camera  
for detailed information, such as how to  
switch from PictBridge mode to USB mass  
storage mode.  
1
1
USB direct interface  
b Turn on the camera.  
For print settings, see Print Images  
c Follow the steps in Print Images  
WARNING  
To prevent damage to your machine, do not  
connect any device other than a digital  
camera or USB Flash memory drive to the  
USB direct interface.  
13  
127  
     
Chapter 13  
Understanding the  
Error Messages  
13  
Once you are familiar with the types of errors  
that can occur while you are printing from a  
camera, you can easily identify and  
troubleshoot any problems.  
Out of Memory  
This message will appear if you are  
working with images that are too large for  
the machine's memory.  
Unusable Device  
This message will appear if you connect a  
camera that is not using the USB Mass  
Storage standard. This message will also  
appear if you connect a broken device to  
the USB direct interface.  
(For more detailed solutions see Error and  
128  
 
Section V  
Software  
V
 
Software and Network features  
14  
14  
The CD-ROM includes the Software User’s  
Guide and Network User’s Guide for features  
available when connected to a computer (for  
example, printing and scanning). These guides  
have easy to use links that, when clicked, will  
take you directly to a particular section.  
c Click the heading you would like to view  
from the list at the left of the window.  
You can find information on these features:  
Printing  
Scanning  
®
ControlCenter3 (for Windows )  
®
ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh )  
Remote Setup  
Faxing from your computer  
®
PhotoCapture Center  
®
(For Macintosh )  
Network Printing  
®
a Make sure your Macintosh is turned  
Network Scanning  
on. Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your  
CD-ROM drive.  
Wired and Wireless Network  
How to read HTML User’s Guide  
This is a quick reference for using the HTML  
User’s Guide.  
b Double-click the Documentation icon.  
c Double-click your language folder, and  
®
(For Windows )  
then double-click top.html file.  
Note  
d Click SOFTWARE USER’S GUIDE (or  
NETWORK USER’S GUIDE) in the top  
menu, and then click the heading you  
would like to read from the list at the left  
of the window.  
If you have not installed the software, see  
a From the Start menu, point to Brother,  
MFC-XXXX (where XXXX is your model  
number) from the programs group, then  
click User’s Guides in HTML format.  
b Click SOFTWARE USER’S GUIDE (or  
NETWORK USER’S GUIDE) from the  
top menu.  
130  
 
Safety and Legal  
A
A
Choosing a location  
A
Put your machine on a flat, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk. Put  
the machine near a telephone wall jack and a standard AC power outlet. Choose a location where  
the temperature remains between 50° F and 95° F (10° C and 35° C).  
WARNING  
DO NOT put the machine near heaters, air conditioners, refrigerators, medical equipment,  
chemicals or water.  
DO NOT connect your machine to electrical outlets controlled by wall switches or automatic  
timers.  
CAUTION  
• Avoid placing your machine in a high-traffic area.  
• Avoid placing your machine on a carpet.  
• DO NOT expose the machine to direct sunlight, excessive heat, moisture, or dust.  
• Disruption of power can wipe out information in the machine's memory.  
• DO NOT connect your machine to electrical outlets on the same circuit as large appliances  
or other equipment that might disrupt the power supply.  
• Avoid interference sources, such as speakers or the base units of non-Brother cordless  
telephones.  
132  
   
Safety and Legal  
To use the machine safely  
A
Please keep these instructions for later reference and read them before attempting any  
maintenance.  
Note  
If there are faxes in the machine's memory, you need to print them or save them before you  
unplug the machine from the AC power outlet for more than 24 hours. (To print the faxes in  
memory, see Printing a fax from the memory on page 55. To save the faxes in memory, see  
WARNING  
There are high voltage electrodes inside the machine. Before you clean the inside of the  
machine, make sure you have unplugged the telephone line cord first and then the power cord  
from the AC power outlet. Doing this will prevent an electrical shock.  
DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.  
Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.  
A
DO NOT pull on the middle of the AC power cord. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.  
133  
 
DO NOT put your hands on the edge of the machine under the document cover or the scanner  
cover. Doing this may cause injury.  
DO NOT put your hands on the edge of the paper tray under the paper tray cover. Doing this  
may cause injury.  
134  
Safety and Legal  
DO NOT touch the area shaded in the illustration. Doing this may cause injury.  
When moving the machine you must lift it from the base, by placing a hand at each side of the  
unit as shown in the illustration. Do not carry the machine by holding the scanner cover.  
DO NOT use flammable substances or any type of spray to clean the inside or outside of the  
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.  
A
135  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. DO NOT use  
liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
If the machine becomes hot, releases smoke, or generates any strong smells, immediately  
unplug the machine from the AC power outlet. Call Brother Customer Service. (See Brother  
If metal objects, water or other liquids get inside the machine, immediately unplug the machine  
from the AC power outlet. Call Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers on page i.)  
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or  
terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack.  
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a  
wet location.  
This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of an  
emergency, you must unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off the power  
completely.  
This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the  
rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact a  
qualified electrician.  
Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.  
To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.  
136  
Safety and Legal  
CAUTION  
Lightning and power surges can damage this product! We recommend that you use a quality  
surge protection device on the AC power line and on the telephone line, or unplug the cords  
during a lightning storm.  
WARNING  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to  
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, including the following:  
1 DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink  
or washing machine, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.  
2 Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric  
shock from lightning.  
3 DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
4 DO NOT dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible  
special disposal instructions.  
5 Use only the power cord provided with the machine.  
A
137  
Important safety instructions  
A
1 Read all of these instructions.  
2 Save them for later reference.  
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
4 DO NOT use this product near water.  
5 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing  
serious damage to the product.  
6 Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation. To  
ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings  
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product  
on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over  
a radiator or heater. This product should never be placed in a built-in installation unless proper  
ventilation is provided.  
7 DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord. DO NOT place this product where people  
can walk on the cord.  
8 If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere ratings of the  
products plugged into the extension cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating.  
Also, make sure that the total of all products plugged into the AC power outlet does not exceed  
15 amperes (USA only).  
9 DO NOT place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. DO NOT place  
anything in the path of received faxes.  
10 Wait until pages have exited the machine before picking them up.  
11 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch  
dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never  
spill liquid of any kind on the product. DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself because  
opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and  
may void your warranty. Refer all servicing to a Brother Authorized Service Center. For the  
location of your nearest Brother Authorized Service Center, please call the following:  
In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)  
In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER  
12 Unplug this product from the AC power outlet and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized  
Service Personnel under the following conditions:  
When the power cord is damaged or frayed.  
If liquid has been spilled into the product.  
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed,  
adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions.  
Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive  
work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.  
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.  
138  
 
Safety and Legal  
13 To protect your product against power surges, we recommend the use of a power protection  
device (Surge Protector).  
14 To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, note the following:  
DO NOT use this product near appliances that use water, a swimming pool, or in a wet  
basement.  
DO NOT use the machine during an electrical storm (there is the remote possibility of an  
electrical shock) or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
15 Caution - To reduce the risk of fire, use only No.26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.  
Standard telephone and FCC Notices (These notices are in effect  
on models sold and used in the United States only.)  
A
When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:  
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging  
up.  
Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the  
ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a  
product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided  
to the telephone company.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack,  
USOC RJ11C.  
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network  
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A  
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be  
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for  
details.  
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.  
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an  
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be  
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs,  
contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this  
product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits  
represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier  
products, the REN is separately shown on the label.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in  
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't  
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be  
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
A
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures  
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will  
provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted  
service.  
139  
 
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact  
Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers on page i.) If the equipment is causing harm to  
the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment  
until the problem is resolved.  
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility  
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the  
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about  
what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.  
If you are not able to solve a problem with your machine, call Brother Customer Service. (See  
WARNING  
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall  
outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or  
connected to party lines.  
Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your  
use of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no  
warranties extended or granted by this document.  
This machine has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the  
USA only.  
140  
Safety and Legal  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Declaration of Conformity (USA only)  
A
Responsible Brother International Corporation  
Party:  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA  
TEL: (908) 704-1700  
declares, that the products  
Product Name: MFC-6490CW  
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment  
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or  
transmitter.  
IMPORTANT  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the  
user's authority to operate the equipment.  
A
141  
 
Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)  
A
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
LAN connection  
A
CAUTION  
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.  
International ENERGY STAR® Compliance Statement  
A
®
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR Program is to promote the development and  
popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.  
®
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets  
®
the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.  
142  
     
Safety and Legal  
Legal limitations for copying  
A
Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in either criminal or civil  
liability. This memorandum is intended to be a guide rather than a complete listing of every  
possible prohibition. In case of doubt, we suggest that you check with counsel as to any particular  
questionable documents.  
The following documents issued by the United States/Canadian Government or any of its  
Agencies may not be copied:  
Money  
Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness  
Certificates of Deposit  
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
Selective Service or draft papers  
Passports  
United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
Food Stamps  
Immigration Papers  
Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies  
Identifying badges or insignias  
Copyrighted works cannot be copied. Sections of a copyrighted work can be copied for ‘fair use’.  
Multiple copies would indicate improper use.  
Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.  
Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles may not be copied under certain  
state/provincial laws.  
A
143  
 
Trademarks  
A
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Multi-Function Link is a registered trademark of Brother International Corporation.  
© 2008 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.  
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and other countries.  
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States and/or other countries.  
Macintosh and TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.  
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
Presto! PageManager is a registered trademark of NewSoft Technology Corporation.  
Microdrive is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.  
CompactFlash is a registered trademark of SanDisk Corporation.  
Memory Stick is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
SanDisk is a licensee of the SD and miniSD trademarks.  
xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fujifilm Co. Ltd., Toshiba Corporation and Olympus Optical Co.  
Ltd.  
PictBridge is a trademark.  
Memory Stick Pro, Memory Stick Pro Duo, Memory Stick Duo and MagicGate are trademarks of  
Sony Corporation.  
BROADCOM, SecureEasySetup and the SecureEasySetup logo are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Broadcom Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.  
Wi-Fi, WPA and WPA2 are registered trademarks and Wi-Fi Protected Setup is a trademark of  
Wi-Fi Alliance.  
FaceFilter Studio is a trademark of Reallusion, Inc.  
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License  
Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.  
All other brand and product names mentioned in this User's Guide are registered  
trademarks of their respective companies.  
144  
 
Troubleshooting and Routine  
Maintenance  
B
B
B
Troubleshooting  
B
IMPORTANT  
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be  
made from within that country.  
If you think there is a problem with your machine, check the chart below and follow the  
troubleshooting tips.  
Most problems can be easily resolved by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother  
Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips. Visit us at  
If you are having difficulty with your machine  
B
Printing  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
No printout  
Check the interface cable or wireless connection on both the machine and your  
computer. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)  
Check that the machine is plugged in and that the On/Off key is on.  
One or more ink cartridges are empty. (See Replacing the ink cartridges  
Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and  
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.  
Make sure that the machine is online. Click Start and then Printers and Faxes.  
Choose Brother MFC-XXXX (where XXXX is your model name), and make sure  
that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.  
When you choose the Print Odd Pages and Print Even Pages settings, you may  
see a print error message on your computer, as the machine pauses during the  
printing process. The error message will disappear after the machine re-starts  
printing.  
145  
       
Printing (continued)  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Poor print quality  
Check the print quality. (See Checking the print quality on page 168.)  
Make sure that the Media Type setting in the printer driver or the Paper Type  
setting in the machine’s menu matches the type of paper you are using. (See  
Printing for Windows® or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh® in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM and Paper Size and Type on page 27.)  
Make sure that your ink cartridges are fresh. The following may cause ink to clog:  
The expiration date written on the cartridge package has passed. (Cartridges  
stay usable for up to two years if kept in their original packaging.)  
The ink cartridge was in your machine over six months.  
The ink cartridge may not have been stored properly before use.  
If you are using generic ink, use Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
Try using the recommended types of paper. (See Acceptable paper and other  
The recommended environment for your machine is between 68° F to 91° F (20°  
C to 33° C).  
White horizontal lines appear in text Clean the print head. (See Cleaning the print head on page 167.)  
or graphics.  
If you are using generic ink, use Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
Try using the recommended types of paper. (See Acceptable paper and other  
The machine prints blank pages.  
Characters and lines are stacked.  
Clean the print head. (See Cleaning the print head on page 167.)  
If you are using generic ink, use Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
Check the printing alignment. (See Checking the print alignment on page 169.)  
Printed text or images are skewed. Make sure the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray and the paper side guide  
is adjusted correctly. (See Loading paper and other media on page 9.)  
Make sure the Inner Back Cover and Outer Back Cover are closed properly.  
Smudged stain at the top center of Make sure the paper is not too thick or curled. (See Acceptable paper and other  
the printed page.  
Printing appears dirty or ink seems Make sure you are using the recommended types of paper. (See Acceptable  
to run.  
paper and other media on page 18.) Don't handle the paper until the ink is dry.  
If you are using photo paper, make sure that you have set the correct paper type.  
If you are printing a photo from your PC, set the Media Type in the Basic tab of  
the printer driver.  
Stains appear on the reverse side  
or at the bottom of the page.  
Make sure the printer platen is not dirty with ink. (See Cleaning the machine printer  
Make sure you are using the paper support flap. (See Loading paper and other  
The machine prints dense lines on Check Reverse Order in the Basic tab of the printer driver.  
the page.  
The printouts are wrinkled.  
In the printer driver Advanced tab, click Color Settings, and uncheck  
Bi-Directional Printing for Windows® or Bi-Directional Printing for Macintosh®.  
If you are using generic ink, use Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
Cannot perform ‘page layout’  
printing.  
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the  
same.  
146  
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Printing (continued)  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
B
Print speed is too slow.  
Try changing the printer driver setting. The highest resolution needs longer data  
processing, sending and printing time. Try the other quality settings in the printer  
driver Advanced tab. Also, click Color Settings, and make sure you uncheck  
Color Enhancement (True2Life®).  
Turn the borderless feature off. Borderless printing is slower than normal printing.  
(See Printing for Windows® or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh® in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
True2Life® is not working properly. If the image data is not full color in your application (such as 256 color), True2Life®  
will not work. Use at least 24 bit color data with the True2Life® feature.  
Photo paper does not feed  
properly.  
When you print on Brother Photo paper, load one extra sheet of the same photo  
paper in the paper tray. An extra sheet has been included in the paper package  
for this purpose.  
Clean the paper pick-up roller. (See Cleaning the paper pick-up roller  
Machine feeds multiple pages.  
Make sure the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray. (See Loading paper and  
Check that more than two types of paper are not loaded in the paper tray at any  
one time.  
Printed pages are not stacked  
neatly.  
Make sure you are using the paper support flap. (See Loading paper and other  
Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Printing for Windows® or Printing and  
Faxing for Macintosh® in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
Machine does not print from Adobe  
Illustrator.  
Printing Received Faxes  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Condensed print and white streaks You probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone  
across the page or the top and  
bottom of sentences are cut off.  
line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.  
Vertical black lines when receiving. The sender's scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the  
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.  
Received color fax prints only in  
black & white.  
Replace the color ink cartridges that are empty or nearly empty, and then ask the  
other person to send the color fax again. (See Replacing the ink cartridges  
Check that Memory Receive is set to Off. (See Receiving faxes into memory when  
Check that Setup Receive is set to Color(Max.LTR). With this setting your Ledger  
color faxes will be reduced to Letter size. (See Setting the Receiving Priority  
Left and Right margins are cut off or Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax on page 53.)  
a single page is printed on two  
pages.  
147  
 
Telephone Line or Connections  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Dialing does not work. (No dial  
tone)  
Check that the machine is plugged in and that the On/Off key is on.  
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into  
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.  
(Canada only) Change Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)  
Send a fax manually and wait to hear the fax receiving tones before you press  
Black Start or Color Start. (See Sending a fax manually on page 48.)  
The machine does not answer  
when called.  
Make sure the machine is in the correct receiving mode for your setup. (See  
Choose the correct Receive Mode on page 49.) Check for a dial tone. If possible,  
call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone  
line cord connection to make sure it is plugged into the correct jack on the  
machine. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone  
company to check the line.  
Receiving Faxes  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot receive a fax.  
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into  
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.  
Make sure the machine is in the correct receiving mode for your setup. (See  
If you often have interference on the telephone line, try changing the menu setting  
of Compatibility to Basic(for VoIP). (See Telephone line interference  
Sending Faxes  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot send a fax.  
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into  
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.  
Make sure that the Fax  
key is illuminated. (See Entering Fax mode  
Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.  
Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error. (See Reports  
Transmission Verification Report  
says ‘Result:NG’.  
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.  
If you send a PC FAX message and get ‘Result:NG’ on the Transmission  
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To gain extra memory,  
you can turn off Fax Storage (see Turning off Memory Receive Operations  
on page 60), print fax messages in memory (see Printing a fax from the memory  
on page 55) or cancel a Delayed Fax or Polling Job (see Canceling a fax in  
progress on page 42). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to  
check your telephone line.  
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone  
line, try changing the menu setting of Compatibility to Basic(for VoIP). (See  
Poor fax send quality.  
Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your  
machine's scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.  
148  
   
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Sending Faxes (continued)  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
B
Vertical black lines when sending.  
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid  
on the glass strip. Clean the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner glass  
Handling Incoming Calls  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a  
CNG Tone.  
If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may  
mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling  
and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing  
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive off. (See Easy  
Sending a fax call to the machine. If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Fax Receive  
Code (the factory setting is l 5 1). When your machine answers, hang up.  
Custom features on a single line.  
If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Voice Mail, an alarm system or  
other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create  
a problem sending or receiving faxes.  
For example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and  
its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax,  
the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother's ECM feature  
should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone  
system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information  
on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is  
crucial to your business, a separate telephone line with no custom features is  
recommended.  
Copying Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot make a copy.  
Make sure that the Copy  
key is illuminated. (See Entering Copy mode  
Poor copy results when using the  
ADF.  
Try using the scanner glass. (See Using the scanner glass on page 23.)  
Vertical black lines or streaks  
appear in copies.  
Vertical black lines or streaks on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction  
fluid on the scanner. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the white bar and  
white plastic above them. (See Cleaning the scanner glass on page 166.)  
Fit to Page does not work properly. Make sure the document is not skewed on the scanner glass.  
Scanning Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
TWAIN/WIA errors appear when  
starting to scan.  
Make sure the Brother TWAIN/WIA driver is chosen as the primary source. In  
PaperPort11SE with OCR, click File, Scan and choose the Brother  
TWAIN/WIA driver.  
Poor scanning results when using  
the ADF.  
Try using the scanner glass. (See Using the scanner glass on page 23.)  
OCR does not work.  
Try increasing the scanner resolution.  
149  
       
Software Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot install software or print.  
Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair  
and reinstall the software.  
‘Device Busy’  
Make sure the machine is not showing an error message on the LCD.  
Cannot print images from  
FaceFilter Studio.  
To use FaceFilter Studio, you must install the FaceFilter Studio application from  
the CD-ROM supplied with your machine. To install FaceFilter Studio see the  
Quick Setup Guide.  
Also, before you start FaceFilter Studio for the first time, you must make sure your  
Brother machine is turned On, and connected to your computer. This will allow you  
to access all the functions of FaceFilter Studio.  
®
PhotoCapture Center Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Removable Disk does not work  
properly.  
1
Have you installed the Windows® 2000 update? If not, do the following:  
1) Unplug the USB cable.  
2) Install the Windows® 2000 update using one of the following methods.  
Install MFL-Pro Suite from the CD-ROM. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)  
Download the latest service pack from the Microsoft Web site.  
3) Wait about 1 minute after you restart the PC, and then connect the USB  
cable.  
2
3
Take out the memory card and put it back in again.  
If you have tried ‘Eject’ from within Windows®, take out the memory card  
before you continue.  
4
5
If an error message appears when you try to eject the memory card, it means  
the card is being accessed. Wait a while and then try again.  
If all of the above do not work, turn off your PC and machine, and then turn  
them on again. (You will have to unplug the power cord of the machine to turn  
it off.)  
Cannot access Removable Disk  
from Desktop icon.  
Make sure that you have correctly inserted the memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive.  
Network Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot print over the Network.  
Make sure that your machine is powered on and is online and in Ready mode.  
Print a Network Configuration list (see Reports on page 90.) and check the current  
Network settings printed in this list. Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify  
that the cabling and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the  
machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. If the connections  
are good, the machine shows LAN Activefor 2 seconds.  
(If you are using a wireless connection or are having Network problems, see the  
Network User’s Guide for more information.)  
150  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Network Difficulties (continued)  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
B
(For Windows® users only) Firewall settings on your PC may be rejecting the  
necessary network connection. Follow the instructions below to configure the  
Firewall. If you are using a personal Firewall software, see the User’s Guide for  
your software or contact the software manufacturer.  
The network scanning feature does  
not work.  
The network PC-Fax Receive  
feature does not work.  
For Windows® XP SP2 and Windows Vista® users, see Firewall settings in the  
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.  
For Windows® XP SP1 user’s, please visit the Brother Solutions Center.  
<Windows® users>  
Your computer cannot find your  
machine.  
Firewall settings on you PC may be rejecting the necessary network connection.  
For detail, see the instruction above.  
<Macintosh® users>  
Re-select your machine in the DeviceSelector application located in Macintosh  
HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/Device Selector or from the model of  
ControlCenter2.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Miscellaneous.  
Press OK.  
Dial Tone  
B
Setting the dial tone to Detection will shorten  
the dial detect pause.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Compatibility.  
a Press Menu.  
e Press d or c to choose High, Normalor  
Basic(for VoIP).  
b Press a or b to choose  
Initial Setup.  
Press OK.  
Basic(for VoIP)reduces the  
modem speed to 9600 bps. Unless  
interference is a recurring problem  
on your telephone line, you may  
prefer to use it only when needed.  
c Press a or b to choose Dial Tone.  
d Press d or c to choose Detectionor  
No Detection.  
Normalsets the modem speed at  
Press OK.  
14400 bps.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Highincreases the modem speed to  
33600 bps. (factory setting)  
Telephone line interference  
B
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
If you are having problems sending or  
receiving a fax due to possible interference on  
the telephone line, we recommend that you  
adjust the Equalization for compatibility to  
reduce the modem speed for fax operations.  
Note  
When you change the compatibility to  
Basic(for VoIP), the ECM feature is  
only available for color fax sending.  
a Press Menu.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
Press OK.  
151  
     
Error and Maintenance messages  
B
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur. If this happens, your machine identifies  
the error and shows an error message. The most common error and maintenance messages are  
shown below.  
You can correct most errors and routine maintenance messages by yourself. If you need more  
help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
B&W Print Only  
One or more of the color ink  
Replace the empty ink cartridge. (See  
cartridges are empty. If you click Replacing the ink cartridges on page 162.)  
Grayscale in the Advanced tab of  
the printer driver you can use the  
machine as a black & white printer  
for approximately four weeks  
depending on the number of  
pages you print. If you unplug the  
machine, or take out the empty ink  
cartridge, you cannot use the  
machine until you change to a  
new ink cartridge. If a sending  
machine has a color fax, the  
machine's ‘handshake’ will ask  
that the fax be sent as black &  
white. If the sending machine has  
the ability to convert it, the color  
fax will be printed at your machine  
as a black & white fax.  
Cannot Detect  
Cannot Print  
You installed a new ink cartridge Take out the new ink cartridge and  
too quickly and the machine  
couldn’t detect it.  
re-install it slowly.  
If you are using generic ink the  
machine cannot detect the ink  
cartridge.  
Use a new Genuine Brother Innobella™  
Ink Cartridge. If the error is not cleared, call  
Brother Customer Service.  
One or more of the ink cartridges Replace the empty ink cartridges. (See  
are empty. The machine will stop Replacing the ink cartridges on page 162.)  
all print operations. While memory  
is available, black & white faxes  
will be stored in the memory. If a  
sending machine has a color fax,  
the machine's ‘handshake’ will  
ask that the fax be sent as black &  
white. If the sending machine has  
the ability to convert it, the color  
fax will be stored in the memory  
as a black & white fax.  
152  
       
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Comm.Error  
Poor telephone line quality  
caused a communication error.  
Send the fax again or connect the machine  
to another telephone line. If the problem  
continues, call the telephone company and  
ask them to check your telephone line.  
B
Connection Fail  
Cover is Open  
You tried to poll a fax machine  
that is not in Polled Waiting mode. setup.  
Check the other fax machine's polling  
The scanner cover is not closed  
completely.  
Lift the scanner cover and then close it  
again.  
The ink cartridge cover is not  
completely closed.  
Firmly close the ink cartridge cover until it  
clicks.  
Data Remaining  
Disconnected  
Document Jam  
Print data is left in the machine's Press Stop/Exit. The machine will cancel  
memory.  
the job and clear it from the memory. Try to  
print again.  
The other person or other  
person's fax machine stopped the  
call.  
Try to send or receive again.  
The document was not inserted or See Using the ADF on page 22.  
fed properly, or the document  
scanned from the ADF was too  
long.  
DR Mode in Use  
The machine is set to Distinctive Set Distinctive Ring to off. (See Turning off  
Ring mode. You cannot change  
the Receive Mode from Manual to  
another mode.  
High Temperature  
Hub is Unusable.  
The print head is too warm.  
Allow the machine to cool down.  
A Hub or USB Flash memory  
drive with Hub has been  
connected to the USB direct  
interface.  
A Hub or USB Flash memory drive with  
Hub are not supported. Unplug the device  
from the USB direct interface.  
Image Too Long.  
The proportions of your photo are Choose a regularly proportioned image.  
irregular so effects could not be  
added.  
Image Too Small.  
Ink low  
The size of your photo is too small Choose a larger image.  
to trim.  
One or more of the ink cartridges Order a new ink cartridge. You can  
are running out of ink. If a sending continue printing until the LCD shows  
machine has a color fax, your  
machine's ‘handshake’ will ask  
that the fax be sent as black &  
white. If the sending machine has  
the ability to convert it, the color  
fax will be printed at your machine  
as a black & white fax.  
Cannot Print. (See Ordering  
Low Temperature  
The print head is too cold.  
Allow the machine to warm up.  
153  
   
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Media Error  
The memory card is either  
corrupted, improperly formatted,  
or there is a problem with the  
card.  
Put the card firmly into the slot again to  
make sure it is in the correct position. If the  
error remains, check the media drive (slot)  
of the machine by putting in another  
memory card that you know is working.  
Media is Full.  
No Caller ID  
The memory card or USB flash  
memory drive you are using  
already contains 999 files.  
Your machine can only save to your  
memory card or USB flash memory drive if  
it contains less than 999 files. Try deleting  
unused files to free some space and try  
again.  
There is no incoming call history. If you want to use the Caller ID feature call  
You did not receive calls or you your telephone company. (See Caller ID  
have not subscribed to the Caller on page 71.)  
ID service from your telephone  
company.  
No Cartridge  
No File  
An ink cartridge is not installed  
properly.  
Reinstall the ink cartridge. (See Replacing  
The memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive in the media drive  
does not contain a .JPG file.  
Put the correct memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive into the slot again.  
No Paper Fed  
The machine is out of paper or  
paper is not properly loaded in the  
paper tray.  
Do one of the following:  
Refill the paper in the paper tray, and  
then press Black Start or Color Start.  
Remove the paper and load it again  
and then press Black Start or  
Color Start. (See Loading paper and  
The paper is jammed in the  
machine.  
The outer back cover or the inner Open the outer back cover and inner back  
back cover may not be closed  
properly.  
cover, and then close them securely.  
No Response/Busy  
Not Registered  
The number you dialed does not Verify the number and try again.  
answer or is busy.  
You tried to access a One Touch Set up the One Touch or Speed Dial  
or Speed Dial number that is not number. (See Storing Speed Dial numbers  
programmed.  
154  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Out of Memory  
The machine's memory is full.  
Fax sending or copy operation in  
progress  
B
Do one of the following:  
Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other  
operations in progress finish and then  
try again.  
Clear the data in the memory. To gain  
extra memory, you can turn off Memory  
Print the faxes that are in the memory.  
The memory card or USB flash  
Delete unused files fromyour memory card  
memory drive you are using does or USB Flash memory drive to make some  
not have enough free space to  
scan the document.  
free space and then try again.  
Paper Jam  
Paper is jammed in the machine. Open the Outer Back Cover and Inner  
Back Cover (at the back of the machine)  
and remove the jammed paper. (See  
Make sure the paper length guide is set to  
the paper size. Do not extend the paper  
tray when you load A5 or smaller size  
paper.  
Replace Ink  
One or more of the ink cartridges Replace the empty ink cartridge. (See  
are empty.  
Unable to CleanXX The machine has a mechanical  
Open the scanner cover and look on the  
left, middle and right hand side under the  
covers for foreign objects and paper  
scraps. If the error message continues,  
disconnect the machine from the power for  
several minutes, then reconnect it. (The  
machine can be turned off for  
problem.  
OR—  
A foreign object such as a clip or  
ripped paper is in the machine.  
approximately 24 hours without losing  
faxes stored in the memory. See  
155  
   
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Unable to Init. XX The machine has a mechanical  
Open the scanner cover and look on the  
left, middle and right hand side under the  
covers for foreign objects and paper  
scraps. If the error message continues,  
disconnect the machine from the power for  
several minutes, then reconnect it. (The  
machine can be turned off for  
problem.  
OR—  
A foreign object such as a clip or  
ripped paper is in the machine.  
approximately 24 hours without losing  
faxes stored in the memory. See  
Unable to Print XX The machine has a mechanical  
Open the scanner cover and look on the  
left, middle and right hand side under the  
covers for foreign objects and paper  
scraps. If the error message continues,  
disconnect the machine from the power for  
several minutes, then reconnect it. (The  
machine can be turned off for  
problem.  
OR—  
A foreign object such as a clip or  
ripped paper is in the machine.  
approximately 24 hours without losing  
faxes stored in the memory. See  
Unable to Scan XX  
The machine has a mechanical  
problem.  
Open the scanner cover and look on the  
left, middle and right hand side under the  
covers for foreign objects and paper  
scraps. If the error message continues,  
disconnect the machine from the power for  
several minutes, then reconnect it. (The  
machine can be turned off for  
OR—  
A foreign object such as a clip or  
ripped paper is in the machine.  
approximately 24 hours without losing  
faxes stored in the memory. See  
Unusable Device  
A broken device has been  
connected to the USB direct  
interface.  
Unplug the device from the USB direct  
interface, then press On/Off to turn the  
machine off and then on again.  
Disconnect device from  
front connector & turn  
machine off & then on  
Unusable Device  
A USB device or USB Flash memory Unplug the device from the USB direct  
drive that is not supported has been interface.  
connected to the USB direct interface.  
Please Disconnect  
USB Device.  
For more information, visit us at  
Wrong Paper Size  
Paper is not the correct size.  
Make sure the machine’s Paper Size  
setting matches the size of paper you load  
in the tray. Also, check that the machine is  
set to use the tray with the paper size you  
want. Load the correct size of paper, and  
then press Black Start or Color Start.  
156  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Transferring faxes to another fax  
machine  
Error animation  
B
B
Error animation displays step-by-step  
instructions when paper gets jammed. You  
can read the steps at your own pace by  
pressing c to see the next step and d to go  
backward. If you do not press a key after 1  
minute the animation starts running  
automatically again.  
B
If you have not set up your Station ID, you  
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Setting  
your station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)  
a Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error  
temporarily.  
b Press Menu.  
Note  
c Press a or b to choose Service.  
Press OK.  
You can press d, c or OK to pause the  
auto-animation and go back to step-by-  
step mode.  
d Press a or b to choose  
Data Transfer.  
Press OK.  
Transferring yourfaxes orFax  
Journal report  
B
e Press a or b to choose Fax Transfer.  
Press OK.  
If the LCD shows:  
f Do one of the following:  
Unable to CleanXX  
Unable to Init.XX  
Unable to PrintXX  
Unable to ScanXX  
If the LCD shows No Data, there  
are no faxes left in the machine's  
memory.  
Press Stop/Exit.  
We recommend transferring your faxes to  
another fax machine or to your PC. (See  
Enter the fax number to which faxes  
will be forwarded.  
g Press Black Start.  
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report  
to see if there are any faxes you need to  
Note  
If there is an error message on the  
machine's LCD, after the faxes have been  
transferred, disconnect the machine from  
the power source for several minutes, and  
then reconnect it.  
157  
         
Transferring faxes to your PC  
B
Transferring Fax Journal report to  
another fax machine  
B
You can transfer the faxes from your  
machine's memory to your PC. The machine  
can store faxes for approximately 24 hours if  
there is a power failure.  
If you have not set up your Station ID, you  
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Setting  
your station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)  
a Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error  
a Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error  
temporarily.  
temporarily.  
b Press Menu.  
b Make sure you have installed MFL-Pro  
Suite on your PC, and then turn on PC  
FAX Receiving on the PC. (For details  
c Press a or b to choose Service.  
Press OK.  
®
see PC- FAX receiving for Windows in  
the Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
d Press a or b to choose  
Data Transfer.  
Press OK.  
c Make sure you have set PC Fax  
Receive on the machine. (See PC Fax  
e Press a or b to choose  
Report Trans.  
Press OK.  
If faxes are in the machine’s memory  
when you set up PC Fax Receive, the  
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the  
faxes to your PC.  
f Enter the fax number to which the Fax  
Journal report will be forwarded.  
d Do one of the following:  
g Press Black Start.  
To transfer all faxes to your PC,  
press 1. You will be asked if you want  
to also turn on backup print.  
To exit and leave the faxes in the  
memory, press 2.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
158  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Document is jammed inside the ADF  
unit  
Document jam  
B
B
Documents can jam in the ADF unit if they are  
not inserted or fed properly, or if they are too  
long. Follow the steps below to clear a  
document jam.  
B
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
b Lift the document cover.  
Document is jammed in the top of the  
ADF unit  
c Pull the jammed document out to the  
B
right.  
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
b Open the ADF cover.  
c Pull the jammed document out to the  
right.  
d Close the document cover.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
d Close the ADF cover.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
To avoid document jams close the ADF  
cover properly by pressing it down in the  
middle.  
159  
   
c Reset the machine by lifting the scanner  
cover from the front of the machine and  
then closing it. If the error has cleared  
from the LCD go to step i.  
Printer jam or paper jam  
B
Take out the jammed paper depending on  
where it is jammed in the machine.  
If you cannot remove the jammed  
paper from the front of the machine,  
or the error message still appears on  
the LCD after you have removed the  
jammed paper, please go to the next  
step.  
Pull the paper trays (1) out of the machine.  
a
1
d Open the Outer Back Cover (1) at the  
back of the machine. Pull the jammed  
paper out of the machine.  
1
1
b Pull out the jammed paper (1).  
1
1
160  
   
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
e Close the Inner Back Cover (1) if it is  
Note  
open as shown in the illustration.  
• If the paper is jammed under the print  
head, unplug the machine from the power  
source, and then move the print head to  
take out the paper.  
B
1
If the print head has stopped in the right  
corner as shown in the illustration, you  
cannot move the print head. Press  
Stop/Exit until the print head moves to the  
middle. Then unplug the machine from the  
power source, and take out the paper.  
f Close the Outer Back Cover.  
Make sure the Outer Back Cover is  
closed properly.  
• If ink gets on your skin or clothing  
immediately wash it off with soap or  
detergent.  
h Gently close the scanner cover using  
the finger holds on both sides of it as you  
push down on the Scanner Cover  
Support (1).  
g Using both hands, use the plastic tabs  
on both sides of the machine to lift the  
Scanner Cover (1) into the open  
position.  
Make sure that there is no jammed  
paper left in the corners of the machine  
under the plastic covers.  
1
1
161  
Routine maintenance  
B
WARNING  
Be careful not to trap your fingers under the  
scanner cover.  
Replacing the ink cartridges  
B
Always use the finger holds provided on  
both sides of the scanner cover when  
opening and closing it.  
Your machine is equipped with an ink dot  
counter. The ink dot counter automatically  
monitors the level of ink in each of the 4  
cartridges. When the machine detects an ink  
cartridge is running out of ink, the machine  
will tell you with a message on the LCD.  
i Push paper tray #1 and paper tray #2  
firmly back into the machine.  
The LCD will tell you which ink cartridge is low  
or needs replacing. Be sure to follow the LCD  
prompts to replace the ink cartridges in the  
correct order.  
Note  
Make sure you pull out the paper support  
until it clicks.  
Even though the machine tells you that an ink  
cartridge is empty, there will be a small  
amount of ink left in the ink cartridge. It is  
necessary to keep some ink in the ink  
cartridge to prevent air from drying out and  
damaging the print head assembly.  
a Open the ink cartridge cover.  
If one or more ink cartridges are empty,  
for example Black, the LCD shows  
Cannot Print.  
b Press down to unlock the release lever  
and take out the ink cartridge for the  
color shown on the LCD.  
C
Y
K
B
162  
       
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
f Gently push the ink cartridge in until it  
clicks, and then close the ink cartridge  
cover.  
B
C
Y
K
B
C
Y
K
B
c Open the new ink cartridge bag for the  
color shown on the LCD, and then take  
out the ink cartridge.  
d Turn the green knob on the protective  
yellow cap clockwise to release the  
g The machine will automatically reset the  
ink dot counter.  
vaccum seal, then remove the cap (1).  
Note  
• If you replaced an ink cartridge, the LCD  
will ask you to verify that it was a brand  
new one. (For example,  
Did You Change Black) For each  
new cartridge you installed, press 1 (Yes)  
to automatically reset the ink dot counter  
for that color. If the ink cartridge you  
installed is not a brand new one, be sure  
to press 2 (No).  
1
• If the LCD shows No Cartridgeafter  
you install the ink cartridges, check that  
the ink cartridges are installed properly.  
WARNING  
If ink gets in your eyes, wash them out with  
water at once and call a doctor if you are  
concerned.  
e Each color has its own correct position.  
Insert the ink cartridge in the direction of  
the arrow on the label.  
163  
CAUTION  
Brother strongly recommends that you do  
not refill the ink cartridges provided with  
your machine. We also strongly  
recommend that you continue to use only  
Genuine Brother Brand replacement ink  
cartridges. Use or attempted use of  
potentially incompatible ink and/or  
DO NOT take out ink cartridges if you do  
not need to replace them. If you do so, it  
may reduce the ink quantity and the  
machine will not know the quantity of ink left  
in the cartridge.  
cartridges in the Brother machine may  
cause damage to the machine and/or may  
result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our  
warranty coverage does not apply to any  
problem that is caused by the use of  
unauthorized third party ink and/or  
cartridges. To protect your investment and  
obtain premium performance from the  
Brother machine, we strongly recommend  
the use of Genuine Brother Supplies.  
DO NOT touch the cartridge insertion slots.  
If you do so, the ink may stain your skin.  
If ink gets on your skin or clothing  
immediately wash it off with soap or  
detergent.  
If you mix the colors by installing an ink  
cartridge in the wrong position, clean the  
print head several times after correcting the  
cartridge installation.  
Cleaning the outside of the  
machine  
B
Once you open an ink cartridge, install it in  
the machine and use it up within six months  
of installation. Use unopened ink cartridges  
by the expiration date written on the  
cartridge package.  
CAUTION  
Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with  
volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine  
will damage the outside surface of the  
machine.  
DO NOT dismantle or tamper with the ink  
cartridge, this can cause the ink to leak out  
of the cartridge.  
DO NOT use cleaning materials that  
contain ammonia.  
DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove  
dirt from the control panel. It may crack the  
panel.  
164  
 
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Clean the outside of the machine as  
follows:  
d Wipe the paper trays with a soft cloth to  
B
remove dust.  
B
a Pull the paper trays (1) completely out of  
the machine.  
1
e Put the paper trays firmly back in the  
machine.  
1
b Wipe the outside of the machine with a  
soft cloth to remove dust.  
c Remove anything that is stuck inside the  
paper tray.  
165  
Cleaning the scanner glass  
B
Cleaning the machine printer  
platen  
B
a Lift the document cover (1). Clean the  
scanner glass (2) and the white plastic  
(3) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened  
with a non-flammable glass cleaner.  
WARNING  
Be sure to unplug the machine from the AC  
power outlet before cleaning the printer  
platen (1).  
1
3
If ink is scattered on or around the printer  
platen wipe it off with a soft, dry, lint-free  
cloth.  
a Using both hands, use the plastic tabs  
on both sides of the machine to lift the  
scanner cover until it locks securely into  
the open position.  
2
b Clean the machine printer platen (1).  
b In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1)  
and the glass strip (2) with a lint-free  
cloth moistened with a non-flammable  
glass cleaner.  
1
2
Note  
1
In addition to cleaning the scanner glass  
and glass strip with a non-flammable glass  
cleaner, run your finger tip over the glass  
to see if you can feel anything on it. If you  
feel dirt or debris, clean the glass again  
concentrating on that area. You may need  
to repeat the cleaning process three or  
four times. To test, make a copy after each  
cleaning.  
166  
       
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Cleaning the paper pick-up  
roller  
Cleaning the print head  
B
B
To maintain good print quality, the machine  
will automatically clean the print head. You  
can start the cleaning process manually if  
there is a print quality problem.  
B
a Pull the paper trays completely out of  
the machine.  
Clean the print head and ink cartridges if you  
get a horizontal line in the text or graphics on  
your printed pages. You can clean Black only,  
three colors at a time  
b Unplug the machine from the AC power  
outlet and open the Outer Back  
Cover (1) and Inner Back Cover (2) at  
the back of the machine.  
(Cyan/Yellow/Magenta), or all four colors at  
once.  
Cleaning the print head consumes ink.  
Cleaning too often uses ink unnecessarily.  
1
CAUTION  
DO NOT touch the print head. Touching the  
print head may cause permanent damage  
and may void the print head's warranty.  
2
c Clean the Paper Pick-up Roller (1) with  
a Press Ink.  
isopropyl alcohol on a cotton swab.  
b Press a or b to choose Cleaning.  
Press OK.  
1
c Press a or b to choose Black, Coloror  
All.  
Press OK.  
The machine cleans the print head.  
When cleaning is finished, the machine  
will go back to standby mode  
automatically.  
d Close the Inner Back Cover and the  
Outer Back Cover.  
Note  
If you clean the print head at least five  
times and the print has not improved, call  
Brother Customer Service. (See Brother  
Make sure the Outer Back Cover is  
closed properly.  
e Put the paper trays firmly back in the  
machine.  
f Re-connect the power cord.  
167  
       
h The LCD asks you if you want to start  
Checking the print quality  
B
cleaning.  
Press 1 (Yes).  
The machine starts cleaning the print  
head.  
If faded or streaked colors and text appear on  
your output, some of the nozzles may be  
clogged. You can check this by printing the  
Print Quality Check Sheet and looking at the  
nozzle check pattern.  
i After cleaning is finished, press  
Color Start.  
The machine starts printing the Print  
Quality Check Sheet again and then  
return to step e.  
a Press Ink.  
b Press a or b to choose Test Print.  
Press OK.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
If you repeat this procedure at least five  
times and the print quality is still poor,  
replace the ink cartridge for the clogged  
color.  
c Press a or b to choose  
Print Quality.  
Press OK.  
d Press Color Start.  
After replacing the ink cartridge, check  
the print quality. If the problem still  
exists, repeat the cleaning and test print  
procedures at least five times for the  
new ink cartridge. If ink is still missing,  
call Brother Customer Service. (See  
The machine begins printing the Print  
Quality Check Sheet.  
e Check the quality of the four color blocks  
on the sheet.  
f The LCD asks you if the print quality is  
OK.  
CAUTION  
Do one of the following:  
If all lines are clear and visible, press  
1 (Yes) to finish the Print Quality  
check and go to step j.  
DO NOT touch the print head. Touching the  
print head may cause permanent damage  
and may void the print head's warranty.  
If you can see missing short lines as  
shown below, press 2 to choose No.  
Note  
<Black>  
OK  
Poor  
Poor  
i
<Color>  
OK  
When a print head  
nozzle is clogged  
the printed  
sample looks like  
this.  
After the print  
head nozzle is  
cleaned, the  
horizontal lines  
are gone.  
g The LCD asks you if the print quality is  
OK for black and the three colors.  
Press 1 (Yes) or 2 (No).  
168  
       
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Checking the print alignment  
B
Checking the ink volume  
B
You may need to adjust the print alignment  
after transporting the machine or if your  
printed text becomes blurred or images  
become faded.  
Although an ink volume icon appears on the  
LCD, you can use the Ink key to see a large  
graph showing the ink that is left in each  
cartridge.  
B
a Press Ink.  
a Press Ink.  
b Press a or b to choose Test Print.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Ink Volume.  
Press OK.  
The LCD shows the ink volume.  
c Press a or b to choose Alignment.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
The machine starts printing the  
Alignment Check Sheet.  
Note  
You can check the ink volume from your  
®
computer. (See Printing for Windows or  
®
Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the  
e Check the 600 dpi and 1200 dpi test  
prints to see if number 5 most closely  
matches number 0.  
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
f Do one of the following:  
If the number 5 samples of both the  
600 dpi and 1200 dpi test prints are  
the best matches, press 1 (Yes) to  
finish the Alignment Check and go to  
step i.  
If another test print number is a  
better match for either 600 dpi or  
1200 dpi, press 2 (No) to choose it.  
g For 600 dpi, press the number of the test  
print that most closely matches the  
number 0 sample (1-8).  
h For 1200 dpi, press the number of the  
test print that most closely matches the  
number 0 sample (1-8).  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
169  
       
Machine Information  
B
Packing and shipping  
the machine  
B
Checking the serial number  
B
When you transport the machine, use the  
packing materials that came with your  
machine. If you do not pack the machine  
properly, you could void your warranty.  
You can see the machine’s serial number on  
the LCD.  
a Press Menu.  
CAUTION  
b Press a or b to choose  
Machine Info.  
Press OK.  
It is important to allow the machine to ‘park’  
the print head after a print job. Listen  
carefully to the machine before unplugging  
it to make sure that all mechanical noise  
has stopped. Not allowing the machine to  
finish this parking process may lead to print  
problems and possible damage to the print  
head.  
c Press a or b to choose Serial No.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
a Open the ink cartridge cover.  
b Press the lock release lever to release  
the ink cartridge and take out all the ink  
cartridges. (See Replacing the ink  
c Install the light-green protective part and  
then close the ink cartridge cover.  
170  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
h Wrap the machine in the bag and put it  
in the original carton with the original  
packing material.  
CAUTION  
If you are not able to find the light-green  
protective part, DO NOT remove the ink  
cartridges before shipping. It is essential  
that the machine be shipped with either the  
light-green protective part or the ink  
cartridges in position. Shipping without  
them will cause damage to your machine  
and may void your warranty.  
B
d Unplug the machine from the telephone  
wall jack and take the telephone line  
cord out of the machine.  
i
Pack the printed materials in the original  
carton as shown in the illustration. Do not  
pack the used ink cartridges in the carton.  
e Unplug the machine from the AC power  
outlet.  
Note  
f Using both hands, use the plastic tabs  
on both sides of the machine to lift the  
scanner cover into the open position.  
Then unplug the interface cable from the  
machine, if it is connected.  
If you are returning your machine to  
Brother as part of the Exchange Service,  
pack only the machine. Keep all separate  
parts and printed materials to use with  
your ‘Exchange’ machine.  
g Gently close the scanner cover using  
the finger holds on both sides of it as you  
push down on the Scanner Cover  
Support (1).  
1
WARNING  
Be careful not to trap your fingers under the  
scanner cover.  
Always use the finger holds provided on  
both sides of the scanner cover when  
opening and closing it.  
j Close the carton and tape it shut.  
171  
Menu and Features  
C
C
On-screen  
programming  
Mode and menu keys  
C
C
Access the main menu.  
Your machine is designed to be easy to  
operate with LCD on-screen programming  
using the menu keys. User-friendly  
programming helps you take full advantage of  
all the menu selections your machine has to  
offer.  
Access the mode and its menu of  
temporary settings.  
Since your programming is done on the LCD,  
we have created step-by-step on-screen  
instructions to help you program your  
machine. All you need to do is follow the  
instructions as they guide you through the  
menu selections and programming options.  
a
b
d
Scroll through the current menu  
level.  
Go back to the previous menu  
level.  
Menu table  
C
c
Go to the next menu level.  
Go to the next menu level.  
Accept an option.  
You can program your machine by using the  
Menu table that begins on page 173. These  
pages list the menu selections and options.  
Cancel the current operation.  
Memory storage  
C
Go back to the previous menu  
level.  
Even if there is a power failure, you will not  
lose the settings you have chosen using the  
Menu key because they are stored  
permanently. Also, you will not lose your  
settings in the PhotoCapture, Fax and Copy  
mode key menus if you have chosen  
Set New Default. You may have to reset  
the date and time.  
Stop the current operation.  
Note  
During a power failure the machine will  
retain messages that are in the memory  
for approximately 24 hours.  
172  
         
Menu and Features  
Menu table  
C
The menu table will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the  
machine's programs. The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
Menu (  
)
C
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Off  
Descriptions  
Page  
General Setup Mode Timer  
Sets the time to return to  
Fax mode.  
0Sec  
30Secs  
1Min  
2Mins*  
5Mins  
Tray Setting Tray#1  
Paper Type  
(Options)  
Plain Paper*  
Inkjet Paper  
Brother BP71  
Other Glossy  
Transparency  
Paper Size  
(Options)  
Letter*  
Legal  
Sets the size and type of  
paper in paper tray #1.  
Ledger  
A4  
A5  
A3  
4"x6"  
Tray#2  
Paper Type  
(Option)  
Sets the size of the paper 27  
in the paper tray #2.  
Plain Paper  
Paper Size  
(Options)  
Letter*  
Legal  
Ledger  
A4  
A3  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
173  
   
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
General Setup Tray Setting  
Tray Use:Copy Tray#1*  
Tray#2  
Choose the tray that will  
be used for Copy mode.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
Tray Use:Fax Tray#1  
Tray#2  
Choose the tray that will  
be used for Fax mode.  
Auto Select*  
Off  
Volume  
Ring  
Adjusts the ring volume.  
Low  
Med*  
High  
Off  
Beeper  
Speaker  
Adjusts the volume level  
of the beeper.  
Low*  
Med  
High  
Off  
Adjusts the speaker  
volume.  
Low  
Med*  
High  
On  
Auto Daylight  
PwrOff Setting  
Change this setting to On 30  
if you want the machine to  
change automatically for  
Daylight Savings Time.  
Off*  
Fax Receive:On Customizes the On/Off key to 25  
receive faxes even in off mode.  
Fax Receive:Off  
*
LCD Settings LCD Contrast Light  
Adjusts the contrast of the 31  
LCD.  
Med*  
Dark  
Backlight  
Dim Timer  
Light*  
Med  
You can adjust the  
brightness of the LCD  
backlight.  
Dark  
Off  
You can set how long the 32  
LCD backlight stays on  
after the last key press.  
10Secs  
20Secs  
30Secs*  
Wallpaper  
You can choose the  
wallpaper of the LCD.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
174  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
1Min  
Descriptions  
Page  
General Setup Sleep Mode  
You can choose how long 31  
the machine must be idle  
before it goes into sleep  
mode.  
(Continued)  
2Mins  
3Mins  
5Mins  
10Mins*  
30Mins  
60Mins  
On  
C
LGR - Short  
Grain  
Turn on this setting when 28  
you use Ledger short  
grain paper.  
Off*  
Function Lock Set Password  
Lock OffiOn  
You can restrict selected  
machine operation for up  
to 20 restricted users and  
Setup User  
for allother non-authorized  
Public users.  
Reset All Users  
Fax  
Setup Receive Ring Delay  
0
Sets the number of rings  
before the machine  
answers in Fax Only or  
Fax/Tel mode.  
1
2
3
4*  
F/T Ring Time 20Secs*  
Sets the pseudo/double-  
ring time in Fax/Tel mode.  
30Secs  
40Secs  
70Secs  
Easy Receive On*  
Off  
Receives fax messages  
without pressing the  
Black Start or  
Color Start key.  
Remote Codes On*  
( 51, #51)  
Allows you to answer all  
calls at an extension  
telephone and use codes  
to turn the machine on or  
off. You can personalize  
these codes.  
Off  
B&W/Color  
B&W(Max.LGR)* Set your priority for  
received faxes, which can  
be either black & white  
ledger size or color letter  
size.  
Color(Max.LTR)  
Auto Reduction On*  
Off  
Reduces the size of  
incoming faxes.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
175  
Level1  
Fax  
Level2  
Setup Receive Memory Receive Off*  
(Continued) Fax Forward  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
You can set the machineto 56  
either forward fax  
messages, call your pager,  
store incoming faxes in the  
memory (so you can  
(Continued)  
Paging  
Fax Storage  
retrieve themwhile you are  
PC Fax Receive away from your machine),  
or send faxes to your PC.  
If you choose Fax Forward  
or PC Fax Receive, you  
can turn on the safety  
feature Backup Print.  
Report Setting Transmission On  
On+Image  
Initial setup for  
Transmission Verification  
Report and Fax Journal  
Report.  
Off*  
Off+Image  
Off2  
Off2+Image  
Journal Period Off  
Every 50 Faxes  
*
Every 6 Hours  
Every 12 Hours  
Every 24 Hours  
Every 2 Days  
Every 7 Days  
Print Fax  
Prints incoming faxes  
stored in the memory.  
Remote Access  
Remaining Jobs  
---  
Set your own code for  
Remote Retrieval.  
Check which jobs are in  
the memory and lets you  
cancel chosen jobs.  
Miscellaneous Compatibility High*  
Adjusts the modem speed 151  
to help resolve  
transmission problems.  
Normal  
Basic(for VoIP)  
Distinctive Off*  
Set(On)  
UsestheTelephone company's 69  
Distinctive Ring subscriber  
service to register the ring  
pattern with the machine.  
Caller ID  
Area Code  
View or print a list of the  
last 30 Caller IDs stored in  
the memory.  
(USA only)  
Set up your 3-digit area  
code only if you do not dial it  
within your own area code.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
176  
Menu and Features  
Network menu  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
Auto*  
Descriptions  
Network  
Wired LAN  
TCP/IP  
BOOT Method  
Chooses the  
BOOT method  
that best suits  
your needs.  
Static  
RARP  
C
BOOTP  
DHCP  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
Enter the IP  
address.  
Enter the Subnet  
mask.  
Enter the  
Gateway  
address.  
Node Name  
BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node  
name.  
WINS Config  
Auto*  
Chooses the  
WINS  
configuration  
mode.  
Static  
WINS Server  
DNS Server  
APIPA  
(Primary)  
000.000.000.000 address of the  
Specifies the IP  
primary or  
(Secondary)  
secondary  
000.000.000.000  
server.  
(Primary)  
000.000.000.000 address of the  
Specifies the IP  
primary or  
(Secondary)  
secondary  
000.000.000.000  
server.  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-localaddress  
range.  
Off  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
177  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
On  
Descriptions  
Network  
(Continued)  
Wired LAN  
(Continued)  
TCP/IP  
IPv6  
Enableor Disable  
the IPv6 protocol.  
If you want to use  
the IPv6 protocol,  
visit  
(Continued)  
Off*  
more information.  
Ethernet  
Auto*  
Chooses the  
Ethernet link  
mode.  
100B-FD  
100B-HD  
10B-FD  
10B-HD  
Auto*  
WLAN  
TCP/IP  
BOOT Method  
Chooses the  
BOOT method  
that best suits  
your needs.  
Static  
RARP  
BOOTP  
DHCP  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
Enter the IP  
address.  
Enter the Subnet  
mask.  
Enter the  
Gateway  
address.  
Node Name  
BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node  
name.  
WINS Config  
Auto*  
Chooses the WINS  
configuration  
mode.  
Static  
WINS Server  
(Primary)  
Specifies the IP  
000.000.000.000 address of the  
primary or  
(Secondary)  
secondary  
000.000.000.000  
server.  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
178  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
Descriptions  
Network  
(Continued)  
WLAN  
TCP/IP  
DNS Server  
(Primary)  
000.000.000.000 address of the  
Specifies the IP  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
primary or  
(Secondary)  
secondary  
000.000.000.000  
server.  
C
APIPA  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-localaddress  
range.  
Off  
IPv6  
On  
Sets the IPv6  
protocol On.  
Off*  
Setup Wizard  
SES/WPS/AOSS  
You can  
configure your  
print server.  
You can easily  
configure your  
wireless network  
settings using the  
one-button push  
method.  
WPS w/PIN Code  
You can easily  
configure your  
wireless network  
settings using  
WPS with a PIN  
code.  
WLAN Status Status  
Signal  
You can see the  
current wireless  
network status.  
You can see the  
current wireless  
network signal  
strength.  
SSID  
You can see the  
current SSID.  
Comm. Mode  
You can see the  
current  
Communication  
Mode.  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
179  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
Descriptions  
Network  
(Continued)  
E-mail/IFAX  
Mail Address Mail Address  
Enter the mail  
address. (Up to  
60 characters)  
Setup Server SMTP Server  
Name  
Enter the SMTP  
(Up to 30 characters) server address.  
IP Address  
[000-255]. [000  
-
-
255].  
255]  
[000 255]. [000  
-
SMTP Port  
[00001-65535]  
Enter the SMTP  
port number.  
Auth. for SMTP None  
Selects the  
Security method  
for E-mail  
SMTP-AUTH  
POP bef.SMTP  
Name  
notification  
POP3 Server  
Enter the POP3  
(Up to 30 characters) server address.  
IP Address  
[000-255]. [000  
-
-
255].  
255]  
[000 255]. [000  
-
POP3 Port  
[00001-65535]  
Enter the POP3  
port number.  
Mailbox Name  
Enter the mail  
box name. (Up to  
20 characters)  
Mailbox Pwd  
Enter the  
password to login  
to the POP3  
server. (Up to 20  
characters)  
APOP  
On  
Enables or  
disables APOP.  
Off*  
Setup Mail RX Auto Polling On*  
Automatically  
checks the POP3  
server for new  
messages.  
Off  
Poll Frequency 10Min(s)  
Sets the interval  
for checking for  
new messages  
on the POP3  
server.  
Header  
All  
Selects the  
contents of the  
mail header to be  
printed.  
Subject+From+To  
None*  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
180  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
Descriptions  
Network  
(Continued)  
E-mail/IFAX  
(Continued)  
Setup Mail RX Del Error Mail On*  
Deletes error  
mails  
automatically.  
(Continued)  
Off  
Notification On  
Receives  
notification  
messages.  
C
MDN  
Off*  
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject  
Displays the  
subject that is  
attached to the  
Internet Fax data.  
Size Limit  
On  
Limits the size of  
E-mail  
documents.  
Off*  
Notification On  
Off*  
Sends  
notification  
messages.  
Setup Relay Rly Broadcast On  
Off*  
Relays a  
document to  
another fax  
machine.  
Relay Domain  
Registers the  
Domain name.  
Relay Report On  
Off*  
Prints the Relay  
Broadcast  
Report.  
Scan to FTP  
Passive Mode Off  
On*  
You can set  
Passive Mode to  
OFF or ON  
depending on  
your FTP server  
and network  
firewall  
configuration.  
Port Number  
You can change  
the port number  
used to access  
the FTP server.  
File Name1  
File Name2  
In addition to the  
seven preset file  
names, you can  
store two user  
defined file  
names that can  
be used for  
creating an FTP  
Server Profile.  
Setup Profile Not Registered  
You can set up  
your FTP Profile.  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
181  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
Descriptions  
Network  
(Continued)  
Time Zone  
UTC+XX:XX  
Sets the time  
zone for your  
country.  
Network I/F  
Wired LAN*  
You can choose  
the network  
connection type.  
WLAN  
Factory Reset  
Restores all  
wired and  
wireless network  
settings to the  
factory default.  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
182  
Menu and Features  
Menu (  
) (continued)  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Print Reports Transmission  
Prints these lists and  
reports.  
C
Help List  
Quick Dial  
Alphabetical  
Order  
Numerical Order  
Fax Journal  
User Settings  
Network Config  
Caller ID hist.  
Machine Info. Serial No.  
Lets you check the serial  
number of your machine.  
Initial Setup Receive Mode  
Fax Only*  
Fax/Tel  
External TAD  
Manual  
Choose the receive mode 49  
that best suits your needs.  
Date&Time  
Puts the date and time on See  
the LCD and in headings  
of faxes you send.  
Quick  
Setup  
Guide  
Station ID  
Fax:  
Set your name and fax  
number to appear on each  
page you fax.  
Name:  
Tone/Pulse  
(Canada only)  
Dial Tone  
Tone*  
Choose the dialing mode.  
Pulse  
Detection  
No Detection*  
English*  
Spanish  
You can shorten the dial  
tone detect pause.  
Local Language  
Allows you to change the See  
LCD language for your  
country.  
Quick  
Setup  
Guide  
(US only)  
Local Language  
English*  
Allows you to change the  
LCD language for your  
country.  
(Canada only)  
French  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
183  
Fax (  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Standard*  
Fine  
Descriptions  
Page  
Fax Resolution  
Sets the resolution for  
outgoing faxes.  
S.Fine  
Photo  
Auto*  
Light  
Dark  
Contrast  
Changes the lightness or  
darkness of faxes you send.  
Glass ScanSize  
Letter*  
Legal  
Ledger  
A4  
To fax a Legal, Ledger, A3 or 41  
A4 size document, you'll  
need to change the Glass  
ScanSize setting.  
A3  
Phone Book  
Search  
Alphabetical  
Order  
You can dial by pressing only 80  
a few keys (and Start).  
Numerical Order  
Set One Touch  
Dial  
You can store One Touch  
numbers, so you can dial by  
pressing only the One Touch  
key (and Start).  
Set Speed Dial  
Setup Groups  
You can store Speed Dial  
numbers, so you can dial by  
pressing only a few keys  
(and Start).  
Sets up a Group number for 86  
Broadcasting.  
Outgoing Call Send a fax  
You can choose a number  
from the Outgoing Call  
history and then make a  
telephone call to it, send a  
fax to it, add it to Speed Dial,  
or delete it.  
Add To Phone  
Book  
Delete  
Caller ID hist. Send a fax  
You can choose a number  
from the Caller ID history and  
then make a telephone call  
to it, send a fax to it, add it to  
Speed Dial, or delete it.  
Add To Phone  
Book  
Delete  
Broadcasting Add Number  
Phone Book  
You can send the same fax  
message to more than one  
fax number.  
Complete  
Delayed Fax  
On(00:00)  
Off*  
Sets the time of day in  
24-hour format that the  
delayed faxes will be sent.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
184  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
On  
Descriptions  
Page  
Batch TX  
Combines delayed faxes to  
the same fax number at the  
same time of day into one  
transmission.  
Off*  
Real Time TX  
Polled TX  
On  
You can send a fax without  
using the memory.  
C
Off*  
On  
Sets up your machine with  
an document to be retrieved  
by another fax machine.  
Off*  
Polling RX  
On  
Sets up your machine to poll 91  
another fax machine.  
Off*  
On  
Overseas Mode  
If you are having difficulty  
sending faxes overseas, set  
this to On.  
Off*  
Set New Default  
Factory Reset  
Yes  
No  
You can save your fax  
settings.  
Yes  
No  
You can restore all settings  
to the factory settings.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
185  
Scan (  
)
Level1  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Descriptions  
Page  
Scan to E-mail  
PC  
You can scan a black & white See  
or a color document into your Software  
E-mail application.  
User's  
Guide  
on the  
E-mail Server Phone Book  
Quality  
Alphabetical  
Order  
You can for search E-mail  
addresses you have stored in  
your machine.  
CD-ROM  
Numerical Order  
Color 150 dpi  
*
Choose the file format to  
send the scanned data as an  
E-mail attachment.  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
B/W 200x100 dpi  
B/W 200 dpi  
File Type  
(If you chose  
color option in  
Quality setting)  
PDF*  
JPEG  
(If you chose  
B&W option in  
Quality setting)  
PDF*  
TIFF  
Glass ScanSize Letter*  
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3  
or A4 size document, you'll  
need to change the Glass  
ScanSize setting.  
Legal  
Ledger  
A4  
A3  
Set New Default Yes  
No  
You can save your scan  
settings as the default  
settings.  
Factory Reset Yes  
You can restore all settings to  
the original factory default  
settings.  
No  
Scan to Image  
Scan to OCR  
Scan to File  
You can scan a color picture  
into your graphics  
application.  
You can have your text  
document converted to an  
editable text file.  
You can scan a black & white  
or a color document into your  
computer.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
186  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Descriptions  
Page  
Scan to Media Quality  
(when a memory  
card or USB  
Color 150 dpi  
*
You can choose the scan  
resolution, file format and  
enter a file name for your  
Color 300 dpi  
Flash memory  
drive is inserted)  
Color 600 dpi document.  
B/W 200x100 dpi  
C
B/W 200 dpi  
File Type  
(If you chose  
color option in  
Quality setting)  
PDF*  
JPEG  
(If you chose  
B&W option in  
Quality setting)  
PDF*  
TIFF  
Glass ScanSize  
Letter*  
Legal  
Ledger  
A4  
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3 123  
or A4 size document, you'll  
need to change the Glass  
ScanSize setting.  
A3  
File Name  
You can rename the file.  
Set New Default  
Yes  
You can save your scan  
settings as the default  
settings.  
No  
Factory Reset  
Yes  
No  
You can restore all settings to 123  
the original factory default  
settings.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
187  
Level1  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Descriptions  
Page  
Scan to FTP  
(Profile Name)  
Enter the name that you want See  
to use for the profile of the  
Software  
FTP server. This name will be User's  
displayed on the LCD screen. Guide  
on the  
CD-ROM  
Manual  
Quality  
Color 150 dpi  
*
Choose the file format to  
send the scanned data as an  
E-mail attachment.  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
B/W 200x100 dpi  
B/W 200 dpi  
File Type  
(If you chose  
color option in  
Quality setting)  
PDF*  
JPEG  
(If you chose  
B&W option in  
Quality setting)  
PDF*  
TIFF  
Glass ScanSize Letter*  
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3  
or A4 size document, you'll  
need to change the Glass  
ScanSize setting.  
Legal  
Ledger  
A4  
A3  
File Name  
You can rename the file.  
Set New Default Yes  
You can save your scan  
settings as the default  
settings.  
No  
Factory Reset Yes  
You can restore all settings to  
the original factory default  
settings.  
No  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
188  
Menu and Features  
Copy (  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Fast  
Descriptions  
Page  
Quality  
Choosethe Copyresolution 95  
for your type of document.  
Normal*  
Best  
C
Enlarge/Reduce 100%  
Enlarge  
104% EXEiLTR  
142% LTRiLGR  
You can choose the  
enlargement or reduction  
ratio for your type of  
186% 4"x6"iLTR document.  
198% 4"x6"iA4  
Reduce  
46% LTRi4"x6" You can choose the  
enlargement or reduction  
64% LGRiLTR  
ratio for your type of  
78% LGLiLTR  
83% LGLiA4  
93% A4iLTR  
97% LTRiA4  
document.  
Fit to Page  
Your machine will adjust  
the size automatically to the  
paper size you set.  
Custom(25-400%)  
You can choose the  
enlargement or reduction  
ratio for your type of  
document.  
Tray Select  
Paper Type  
Tray#1*  
Tray#2  
Choose the tray that will be 100  
used for Copy mode.  
Plain Paper*  
Inkjet Paper  
Brother BP71  
Other Glossy  
Transparency  
Letter*  
Legal  
Choose the paper type that 99  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Paper Size  
Choose the paper size that 99  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Ledger  
A4  
A5  
A3  
4"x 6"  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
189  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Brightness  
Adjusts the brightness of  
copies.  
Light  
+2  
+1  
-1  
-2  
Dark  
Contrast  
Adjusts the contrast of  
copies.  
+2  
+1  
-1  
-2  
Stack/Sort  
Stack*  
You can choose to stack or 98  
sort multiple copies.  
Sort  
Page Layout  
Off(1 in 1)*  
2 in 1 (P)  
2 in 1 (L)  
4 in 1 (P)  
4 in 1 (L)  
1 to 2  
(When 2 in 1 is  
chosen)  
You can make N in 1 or  
Poster copies.  
LGRx2 i LGRx1  
LTRx2 i LGRx1  
A3x2 i A3x1  
A4x2 i A3x1  
(When poster 2x2  
is chosen)  
Poster(2x2)  
Poster(3x3)  
LGRx1 i LGRx4  
LTRx1 i LGRx4  
A3x1 i A3x4  
A4x1 i A3x4  
Auto*  
Skew Adjustment  
Book Copy  
If your scanned copy is  
skewed, your machine can  
correct the data  
Off  
automatically.  
On  
Corrects dark borders and  
skew when copying from  
the scanner glass.  
On(Preview)  
Skew Adjustment  
Shadow Revise  
Off*  
Watermark Copy Watermark Copy  
On  
Off*  
You can place a logo or text 101  
into your document as a  
Watermark.  
(If you choose On,  
see the  
watermark copy  
settings in the  
following table.)  
Current Setting  
Exit  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
190  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Yes  
No  
Descriptions  
Page  
Set New Default  
You can save your  
watermark settings.  
Factory Reset  
Yes  
No  
You can restore all settings 102  
to the factory settings.  
C
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
191  
Watermark Copy Settings  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Option4  
Descriptions  
Page  
Template  
Text  
CONFIDENTIAL* Uses a template to place  
text into your document as  
a Watermark.  
DRAFT  
COPY  
Position  
A
B
C
D
E*  
F
G
H
I
Pattern  
Small  
Medium*  
Large  
-90°  
-45°*  
0°  
Size  
Angle  
45°  
90°  
Transparency -2  
-1  
0*  
+1  
+2  
Color  
Red  
Orange  
Yellow  
Blue  
Green  
Purple  
Black*  
Apply  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
192  
Menu and Features  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Option4  
Descriptions  
Page  
Media  
(Select image  
from media)  
Position  
A
Places a logo or text into  
your document as a  
Watermark using an image  
from removable media.  
B
C
D
C
E*  
F
G
H
I
Pattern  
Small  
Medium*  
Large  
-90°  
-45°*  
0°  
Size  
Angle  
45°  
90°  
Transparency -2  
-1  
0*  
+1  
+2  
Apply  
Scan  
(Set page and  
press start)  
Transparency -2  
You can choose the level of 102  
transparency of the  
watermark as you scan it  
from a paper document.  
-1  
0*  
+1  
+2  
Apply  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
193  
Photo Capture (  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
View Photo(s)  
See the print  
settings in the  
following table.  
You can preview your  
photos on the LCD.  
Print Index  
Layout Format 6 Images/Line  
*
You can print a thumbnail  
page.  
5 Images/Line  
Plain Paper*  
Inkjet Paper  
Brother BP71  
Other Glossy  
Letter*  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
A4  
Print Photos  
See the print  
settings in the  
following table.  
You can print an individual 110  
image.  
Enhance Photos Auto Correct  
You can adjust your photos 111  
with these settings.  
Enhance Skin-  
Tone  
Enhance Scenery  
Remove Red-Eye  
Monochrome  
Sepia  
Search by Date  
Print All Photos  
You can search your  
photos from date.  
See the print  
settings in the  
following table.  
You can print all photos in  
your memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive.  
Slide show  
Trimming  
The machine starts a slide 115  
show of your photos.  
You can trim your photo  
and print a part of the  
image.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
194  
Menu and Features  
Print Settings  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Option4  
Descriptions  
Page  
Print Quality Normal  
Photo*  
Choose the print quality.  
C
Paper Type  
Plain Paper  
Choose the paper type.  
Inkjet Paper  
Brother BP71  
Other Glossy*  
4"x 6"*  
5"x 7"  
Paper Size  
(When A4 or  
Letter is chosen)  
Choose the paper and print 118  
size.  
3"x 4"  
3.5"x 5"  
4"x 6"  
5"x 7"  
6"x 8"  
Max. Size*  
Letter  
Ledger  
A4  
A3  
Brightness  
Adjusts the brightness.  
Light  
+2  
(Does not appear  
when  
Enhance Photos  
is chosen.)  
+1  
-1  
-2  
Dark  
Contrast  
Adjusts the contrast.  
+2  
+1  
(Does not appear  
when  
Enhance Photos  
is chosen.)  
-1  
-2  
True2Life  
On  
White Balance  
Sharpness  
Color Density  
Adjusts the hue of the white 119  
areas.  
+2  
+1  
(Does not appear  
when  
Enhance Photos  
is chosen.)  
Off*  
-1  
-2  
Enhances the detail of the  
image.  
+2  
+1  
-1  
-2  
Adjusts the total amount of  
color in the image.  
+2  
+1  
-1  
-2  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
195  
Option1  
Option2  
On*  
Option3  
Option4  
Descriptions  
Page  
Cropping  
Crops the image around the 120  
margin to fit the paper size  
or print size. Turn this  
feature off if you want to  
print whole images or  
prevent unwanted  
Off  
cropping.  
Borderless  
Print Date  
On*  
Off  
On  
Expands the printable area 120  
to fit the edges of the paper.  
Prints the date on your  
photo.  
Does not appear Off*  
when DPOF Print  
is chosen.  
Set New Default  
Yes  
No  
You can save your print  
settings.  
Factory Reset  
Yes  
No  
You can restore all the  
settings to factory settings.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
196  
Menu and Features  
Phone Book ( )  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Search  
Alphabetical  
Order  
You can dial by pressing  
only a few keys (and Start).  
C
Numerical Order  
Set One Touch  
Dial  
You can set up One Touch 82  
Dial numbers, so you can  
dial by pressing only a few  
keys (and Start).  
Set Speed Dial  
Setup Groups  
You can set up Speed Dial 83  
numbers, so you can dial by  
pressing only a few keys  
(and Start).  
You can set up Group  
umbers for Broadcasting.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
Fax Preview (  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
On  
Descriptions  
Page  
Fax Preview  
You can view outgoing and 61  
received faxes on the LCD  
screen.  
Off*  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
197  
Entering Text  
C
When you are setting certain menu selections, such as the Station ID, you may need to enter text  
into the machine. Most dial pad keys have three or four letters printed on keys. The keys for 0, #  
and l do not have printed letters because they are used for special characters.  
By pressing the proper dial pad key repeatedly, you can access the character you want.  
Press  
Key  
one  
time  
two  
times  
three  
times  
four  
times  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
C
F
I
2
3
4
5
6
S
8
Z
L
M
P
T
O
R
V
Y
W
You can enter the lower case characters to set a E-mail address. Press Shift+3 to change  
between upper case and lower case.  
Inserting spaces  
C
To enter a space in a fax number, press c once between numbers. To enter a space in a name,  
press c twice between characters.  
Making corrections  
C
If you entered an incorrect letter and want to change it, press d to move the cursor under the  
incorrect character. Then press Clear/Back. Re-enter the correct character. You can also back  
up and insert letters.  
Repeating letters  
C
If you need to enter a letter that is on the same key as the letter before, press c to move the cursor  
to the right before you press the key again.  
Special characters and symbols  
C
Press l, # or 0, repeatedly until you see the special character or symbol you want.  
Press l for  
Press # for  
Press 0 for  
(space) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) + , - . / m  
: ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _  
USA:  
À Á É Ó Í Ú Ñ Ü 0  
Canada: É À È Ê Î Ç Ë Ö 0  
198  
   
Specifications  
D
D
General  
D
Printer Type  
Print Method  
Ink Jet  
Black:  
Color:  
Piezo with 94 × 2 nozzle  
Piezo with 94 × 3 nozzles  
D
Memory Capacity  
64 MB  
LCD (liquid crystal display)  
Wide 3.3 in. (83.8 mm) Color LCD  
AC 100 to 120 V 50/60 Hz  
Power Source  
Power Consumption  
Off Mode:  
Sleep Mode:  
Standby:  
Average 0.9 W  
Average 4 W  
Average 6 W  
Average 28 W  
Operating:  
1
Measured diagonally  
Dimensions  
12.7 in.  
(323 mm)  
21.3 in.  
(540 mm)  
19.2 in.  
(488 mm)  
22.6 in.  
(574 mm)  
21.4 in.  
(543 mm)  
199  
     
Weight  
Noise  
34.4 lb (15.6 kg)  
Operating:  
Operating:  
50 dB or less  
Temperature  
50° F to 95° F (10 to 35° C)  
Best Print Quality: 68° F to 91° F (20 to 33° C)  
Operating: 20 to 80% (without condensation)  
Best Print Quality: 20 to 80% (without condensation)  
Humidity  
ADF (automatic document For best results we recommend:  
feeder)  
Up to 50 pages  
Temperature: 68° F - 86° F (20° C - 30° C)  
Humidity: 50% - 70%  
2
Paper: 20 lb (80 g/m )  
2
Paper Tray #1  
Paper Tray #2  
150 Sheets 20 lb (80 g/m )  
2
250 Sheets 20 lb (80 g/m )  
1
This depends on printing conditions.  
200  
 
Specifications  
Print media  
D
Paper Input  
Paper Tray  
Paper type:  
Plain paper, inkjet paper (coated paper), glossy  
photo paper , transparencies  
and envelopes  
D
Paper size:  
Ledger, A3, Letter, Legal, Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4,  
JIS B5, envelopes (commercial No.10, DL, C5, Monarch,  
JE4), PhotoL 4"×6", Photo 2L 5"×7", Index card and Post  
card .  
Width: 3.5 in. (89 mm) - 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Length: 5.0 in. (127 mm) - 17.0 in. (431.8 mm)  
For more details, see Paper weight, thickness and  
Maximum paper tray capacity: Approx. 150 sheets of  
2
20 lb (80 g/m ) plain paper  
Paper Tray #2  
Paper type:  
Plain paper  
Paper size:  
Ledger, A3, Letter, Legal, A4, JIS B5, JIS B4, EXE  
Width: 7.2 in. (182 mm) - 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Length: 10.1 in. (257 mm) - 17.0 in. (431.8 mm)  
For more details, see Paper weight, thickness and  
Maximum paper tray capacity: Approx. 250 sheets of  
2
20 lb (80 g/m ) plain paper  
2
Paper Output  
Up to 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m ) plain paper (face up print  
delivery to the output paper tray)  
1
Use only transparencies recommended for inkjet printing.  
2
For glossy photo paper or transparencies, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray  
immediately after they exit the machine to avoid smudging.  
3
201  
         
Fax  
Compatibility  
Coding System  
Modem Speed  
D
ITU-T Group 3  
MH/MR/MMR/JPEG  
Automatic Fallback  
33600 bps  
Document Size  
ADF Width: 5.8 in. to 11.7 in. (148 mm to 297 mm)  
ADF Length: 5.8 in. to 17 in. (148 mm to 431.8 mm)  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 17 in. (431.8 mm)  
11.3 in. (288 mm)  
Scanning Width  
Printing Width  
Gray Scale  
11.5 in. (291 mm)  
256 levels  
Polling Types  
Contrast Control  
Standard, Sequential: (Black only)  
Automatic/Light/Dark  
(manual setting)  
Resolution  
Horizontal 203 dot/in. (8 dot/mm)  
Vertical  
Standard  
98 line/in. (3.85 line/mm) (Black)  
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Color)  
Fine  
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Black/Color)  
Photo  
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Black)  
Superfine  
392 line/in. (15.4 line/mm) (Black)  
6 (3 × 2)  
One Touch Dial  
Speed Dial  
Groups  
100 stations × 2 numbers  
Up to 6  
256 stations  
Broadcasting  
Automatic Redial  
Ring Delay  
1 time after 5 minutes  
0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings  
Communication Source Public switched telephone network.  
Memory Transmission  
Out of Paper Reception  
Up to 480 /400 pages  
Up to 480 /400 pages  
1
2
3
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘Brother Standard Chart No. 1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, MMR code).  
Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.  
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, MMR code). Specifications  
and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.  
Black & White only  
202  
       
Specifications  
Copy  
D
Color/Black  
Yes/Yes  
Document Size  
ADF Width: 5.8 in. to 11.7 in. (148 mm to 297 mm)  
ADF Length: 5.8 in. to 17 in. (148 mm to 355.6 mm)  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 17 in. (431.8 mm)  
Copy Width: Max. 11.46 in. (291 mm)  
D
Copy Speed  
Black: Up to 23 pages/minute (Letter paper)  
Color: Up to 20 pages/minute (Letter paper)  
Multiple Copies  
Enlarge/Reduce  
Resolution  
Stacks/Sorts up to 99 pages  
25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)  
Scans up to 1200×1200 dpi  
Prints up to 1200×1200 dpi  
1
Based on Brother standard pattern (Fast mode/Stack Copy). Copy speeds vary with the complexity of the document.  
203  
   
®
PhotoCapture Center  
Compatible Media  
D
®
CompactFlash  
(Type I only)  
(Microdrive™ is not compatible)  
(Compact I/O cards such as Compact LAN card and  
Compact Modem card are not supported.)  
®
Memory Stick  
Memory Stick Pro™  
(Not available for music data with MagicGate™)  
Memory Stick Duo™ with adapter  
Memory Stick Micro (M2) with adapter  
SD  
SDHC  
microSD with adapter  
miniSD™ with adapter  
xD-Picture Card™  
USB Flash memory drive  
Resolution  
Up to 1200 × 2400 dpi  
File Extension  
(Media Format)  
(Image Format)  
DPOF, EXIF, DCF  
Photo Print: JPEG  
Scan to Media: JPEG, PDF (Color)  
TIFF, PDF (Black)  
®
Color Enhancement  
Photo Enhance  
True2Life  
Auto Correct, Enhance Skin  
-
Tone, Enhance Scenery, Trimming,  
Slide Show, Remove Red-Eye, Monochrome and Sepia  
Number of Files  
Up to 999 files  
(The folder inside memory cards or USB Flash memory drive  
is also counted)  
Folder  
File must be stored in the 4th folder level of the memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive.  
Borderless  
Ledger, A3, Letter, A4, Photo 4" × 6", Photo 5" × 7"  
1
2
3
4
Memory cards, adapters and USB Flash memory drive are not included.  
16MB to 2GB  
4GB to 8GB  
xD-Picture Card™ Conventional Card from 16MB to 512MB  
xD-Picture Card™ Type M from 256MB to 2GB  
xD-Picture Card™ Type H from 256MB to 2GB  
5
USB 2.0 Standard  
USB Mass Storage standard from 16 MB to 8 GB  
Support format: FAT12/FAT16/FAT32  
6
7
Progressive JPEG format is not supported.  
204  
               
Specifications  
PictBridge  
D
Compatibility  
Supports the Camera & Imaging Products Association  
PictBridge standard CIPA DC-001.  
VIsit http://www.cipa.jp/pictbridge for more information.  
USB direct interface  
Interface  
D
205  
 
Scanner  
D
Color/Black  
Yes/Yes  
®
TWAIN Compliant  
Yes (Windows 2000 Professional/XP/XP Professional x64  
®
Edition/Windows Vista )  
®
Mac OS X 10.2.4 or greater  
®
®
WIA Compliant  
Color Depth  
Yes (Windows XP /Windows Vista )  
48 bit color Processing (Input)  
24 bit color Processing (Output)  
(Actual Input: 30 bit color/Actual Output: 24 bit color)  
Resolution  
Up to 19200 × 19200 dpi (interpolated)  
Up to 1200 × 2400 dpi (optical) (Scanner Glass)  
Up to 1200 × 600 dpi (optical) (ADF)  
Black: Up to 3.19 sec.  
Scanning Speed  
Document Size  
Color: Up to 4.22 sec.  
(Letter size at 100 × 100 dpi)  
ADF Width: 5.8 in. to 11.7 in. (148 mm to 297 mm)  
ADF Length: 5.8 in. to 17 in. (148 mm to 431.8 mm)  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 17 in. (431.8 mm)  
Up to 11.46 in. (291 mm)  
Scanning Width  
Gray Scale  
256 levels  
1
Windows® XP in this User’s Guide includes Windows® XP Home Edition, Windows® XP Professional, and Windows®  
XP Professional x64 Edition.  
2
Maximum 1200 × 1200 dpi scanning when using the WIA Driver for Windows® XP and Windows Vista® (resolution up  
to 19200 × 19200 dpi can be selected by using the Brother scanner utility)  
206  
       
Specifications  
Printer  
D
®
Printer Driver  
Windows 2000 Professional/XP/XP Professional x64  
®
Edition/Windows Vista driver supporting Brother  
Native Compression mode  
®
Mac OS X 10.2.4 or greater: Brother Ink Driver  
D
Resolution  
Up to 1200 × 6000 dpi  
1200 × 2400 dpi  
1200 × 1200 dpi  
600 × 600 dpi  
600 × 300 dpi  
600 × 150 dpi (Color)  
450 × 300 dpi (Black & White)  
Printing Width  
10.76 in. [11 in. (borderless) ]  
273 mm [279 mm (borderless) ]  
Borderless  
Ledger, A3, Letter, A4, A6, B4, Photo 4"×6", Index  
Card, Photo L 3.5"×5", Photo 2L 5"×7", Post Card  
1
Output image quality varies based on many factors including, but not limited to input image resolution and quality and  
print media.  
2
3
4
When you set the Borderless feature to On.  
When printing on letter size paper.  
207  
         
Interfaces  
D
USB  
A USB 2.0 interface cable that is no longer than 6 feet (2.0 m).  
Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.  
LAN cable  
Wireless LAN  
Your machine supports IEEE 802.11b/g wireless communication  
with your wireless LAN using Infrastructure mode or a wireless  
Peer-to-Peer connection in Ad-hoc Mode.  
1
Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB  
1.1 interface.  
2
3
Third party USB ports are not supported for Macintosh®.  
See Network (LAN) on page 211 and the Network User's Guide for detailed network specifications.  
208  
       
Specifications  
Computer requirements  
D
SUPPORTED OPERATING SYSTEMS AND SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS  
Hard Disk Space to install  
Computer Platform & Supported  
Processor  
Minimum  
Speed  
PC  
Interface  
Minimum Recommended  
Operating System  
Version  
PCSoftware  
Functions  
For  
For  
RAM  
RAM  
Drivers Applications  
®
®
2000  
Printing,  
USB,  
10/100  
BaseTx  
(Ethernet),  
Wireless  
802.11b/g  
64 MB 256 MB 110 MB 340 MB  
Windows  
Intel  
D
®
Operating Professional  
,
Pentium II  
or equivalent  
Scanning,  
Removable  
Disk  
System  
128 MB  
110 MB 340 MB  
XP Home  
XP  
Professional  
®
XP  
256 MB 512 MB 110 MB 340 MB  
512 MB 1 GB 600 MB 530 MB  
64-bit (Intel 64  
or AMD64)  
Professional  
x64 Edition  
supported CPU  
Intel®Pentium®  
4 or equivalent  
Windows  
Vista  
®
64-bit (Intel 64  
or AMD64)  
supported CPU  
®
®
Printing, PC  
PowerPC  
G4/G5  
128 MB 256 MB 80 MB 400 MB  
Macintosh Mac OS  
Operating  
X
USB ,  
10.2.4 - 10.4.3 FaxSend  
,
10/100  
Scanning,  
Removable (Ethernet),  
Disk  
BaseTx  
PowerPC  
G3 350MHz  
System  
Wireless  
802.11b/g  
®
Printing, PC  
PowerPC  
G4/G5  
512 MB 1 GB  
Mac OS X  
USB ,  
10.4.4 or  
greater  
FaxSend  
Scanning,  
,
10/100  
BaseTx  
Removable (Ethernet),  
®
Intel  
Core™  
Processor  
Disk  
Wireless  
802.11b/g  
Conditions:  
1
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater.  
For the latest driver updates, visit www.brother.com.  
All trademarks, brand and product names are  
property of their respective companies.  
2
For WIA, 1200 x 1200 resolution. Brother Scanner  
Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.  
3
4
Third party USB ports are not supported.  
PC Fax supports black and white only, and does  
not support Ledger/A3 size paper.  
5
6
PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft® SP4 or  
higher for Windows® 2000 and SP2 or higher for XP.  
Presto!® PageManager® on the CD-ROMsupports  
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or higher. For Mac OS® X  
10.2.4-10.3.8 Presto!® PageManager® is available  
as a download from the Brother Solutions Center.  
209  
               
Consumable items  
D
Ink  
The machine uses individual Black, Yellow, Cyan and Magenta ink  
cartridges that are separate from the print head assembly.  
Service Life of Ink  
Cartridge  
The first time you install the ink cartridges the machine will use extra  
ink to fill the ink delivery tubes. This is a one-time process that  
enables high quality printing. Afterward, replacement ink cartridges  
will print the specified number of pages.  
For more information about the replacement consumables, visit us  
Replacement  
Consumables  
<Standard Black> LC61BK, <High Yield Black> LC65HY-BK  
<Standard Cyan> LC61C, <High Yield Cyan> LC65HY-C  
<Standard Magenta> LC61M, <High Yield Magenta> LC65HY-M  
<Standard Yellow> LC61Y, <High Yield Yellow> LC65HY-Y  
What is Innobella™?  
Innobella™ is a range of genuine consumables offered by Brother.  
The name "Innobella™" derives from the words "Innovation" and  
"Bella" (meaning "Beautiful" in Italian) and is a representation of the  
"innovative" technology providing you with "beautiful" and "long  
lasting" print results.  
When you print photo images, Brother recommends Innobella™  
glossy photo paper (BP71 series) for high quality. Brilliant prints are  
made easier with Innobella™ Ink and paper.  
210  
   
Specifications  
Network (LAN)  
D
LAN  
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,  
®
Network Scanning, PC Fax Send, PC Fax Receive (Windows only)  
and Remote Setup . Also included is Brother BRAdmin Light  
Network Management software.  
D
®
Support for  
Windows 2000 Professional/XP/XP Professional x64  
®
Edition/Windows Vista  
®
Mac OS X 10.2.4 or greater  
Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation (Wired LAN)  
IEEE 802.11 b/g (Wireless LAN)  
Protocols  
TCP/IP for IPv4:  
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto  
IP), NetBIOS/WINS, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, DNS Resolver,  
mDNS, FTP Server, TELNET, SNMPv1,  
TFTP, Scanner Port, LLTD responder,  
Web Services, SMTP Client, POP before  
SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, POP3, APOP,  
FTP Client  
TCP/IP for IPv6  
(Turned off as default) NDP, RA, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, mDNS,  
FTP Server, TELNET, SNMPv1, TFTP,  
Scanner Port, LLTD responder,  
Web Services, SMTP Client,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, POP3,  
APOP, FTP Client  
Network Security  
SSID/ESSID, 128 (104) / 64 (40) bit WEP, WPA/WPA2-PSK  
(TKIP/AES)  
Setup Support Utility SecureEasySetup™ Yes (simple setup with your  
(one-push configurati  
on)  
SecureEasySetup™-capable access  
point/router)  
AOSS™  
WPS  
Yes (simple setup with your AOSS™-capable  
access point/router)  
Yes (simple setup with your Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™-capable access point/router)  
1
2
See the Computer Requirements chart on page 209.  
If you require more advanced printer management, use the latest Brother BRAdmin Professional utility version that is  
available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com.  
211  
       
Wireless one-push configuration  
D
If your wireless access point supports either SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™  
(PBC ) or AOSS™, you can configure the machine easily without a computer. By pushing a  
button on the wireless LAN router / access point and the machine, you can set up the wireless  
network and security settings. See the users guide for your wireless LAN router / access point for  
instructions on how to access one-push mode.  
1
Push Button Configuration  
Note  
Routers or access points that support SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ or  
AOSS™ have the symbols shown below.  
212  
   
Glossary  
E
E
This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of  
these features depends on the model you purchased.  
ADF (automatic document feeder)  
CNG tones  
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax  
The document can be placed in the ADF  
and scanned one page at a time  
automatically.  
machines during automatic transmission  
to tell the receiving machine that a fax  
machine is calling.  
Auto Reduction  
E
Coding method  
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.  
Method of coding the information  
contained in the document. All fax  
machines must use a minimum standard  
of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine  
is capable of greater compression  
methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified  
Modified Read (MMR) and JPEG, if the  
receiving machine has the same  
capability.  
Automatic Redial  
A feature that enables your machine to  
redial the last fax number after five  
minutes if the fax did not go through  
because the line was busy.  
Backup Print  
Your machine prints a copy of every fax  
that is received and stored in memory.This  
is a safety feature so you will not lose  
messages during a power failure.  
Communication error (Comm. Error)  
An error during fax sending or receiving,  
usually caused by line noise or static.  
Batch Transmission  
(Black & white faxes only) As a cost  
saving feature, all delayed faxes to the  
same fax number can be sent as one  
transmission.  
Compatibility group  
The ability of one fax unit to communicate  
with another. Compatibility is assured  
between ITU-T Groups.  
Beeper Volume  
Contrast  
Volume setting for the beep when you  
press a key or make an error.  
Setting to compensate for dark or light  
documents, by making faxes or copies of  
dark documents lighter and light  
documents darker.  
Brightness  
Changing the Brightness makes the whole  
image lighter or darker.  
Delayed Fax  
Broadcasting  
Sends your fax at a specified time later.  
The ability to send the same fax message  
to more than one location.  
Distinctive Ring  
A subscriber service purchased from the  
telephone company that gives you  
another telephone number on an existing  
telephone line. The Brother machine uses  
the new number to simulate a dedicated  
fax line.  
Caller ID  
A service purchased from the telephone  
company that lets you see the number (or  
name) of the party calling you.  
213  
 
Dual Access  
Fax tones  
The signals sent by sending and receiving  
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or  
scheduled jobs into memory at the same  
time it is sending a fax from memory or  
receiving or printing an incoming fax.  
fax machines while communicating  
information.  
Fax/Tel  
Easy Receive  
You can receive faxes and telephone  
calls. Do not use this mode if you are  
using a telephone answering device  
(TAD).  
Enables your machine to respond to CNG  
tones if you interrupt a fax call by  
answering it.  
ECM (Error Correction Mode)  
Fine resolution  
Detects errors during fax transmission  
and resends the pages of the fax that had  
an error.  
Resolution is 203 × 196 dpi. It is used for  
small print and graphs.  
Gray Scale  
Extension telephone  
The shades of gray available for copying,  
scanning and faxing photographs.  
A telephone using the same line as your  
fax but plugged into a separate wall jack.  
Group number  
External telephone  
A combination of One Touch and  
Speed Dial numbers that are stored on a  
One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location  
for Broadcasting.  
A telephone that is plugged into the EXT  
jack of your machine.  
F/T Ring Time  
Help list  
The length of time that the Brother  
machine rings (when the Receive Mode  
setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up  
a voice call that it answered.  
A printout of the complete Menu table that  
you can use to program your machine  
when you do not have the User's Guide  
with you.  
Fax Forwarding  
Innobella™  
Sends a fax received into the memory to  
another pre-programmed fax number.  
Innobella™ is a range of genuine  
consumables offered by Brother. For best  
quality results Brother recommends  
Innobella™ Ink and Paper.  
Fax Journal  
Lists information about the last 200  
incoming and outgoing faxes. TX means  
Transmit. RX means Receive.  
Journal Period  
The pre-programmed time period  
between automatically printed Fax  
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax  
Journal on demand without interrupting  
the cycle.  
Fax Preview  
If you turn on Fax Preview you will be able  
to view incoming and outgoing faxes on  
the LCD screen by pressing the  
Fax Preview key.  
LCD (liquid crystal display)  
Fax Receive Code  
The display screen on the machine that  
shows interactive messages during On-  
Screen Programming and shows the date  
and time when the machine is idle.  
Press this code (l 5 1) when you answer  
a fax call on an extension or external  
telephone.  
Fax Storage  
You can store received faxes in memory.  
214  
Glossary  
®
Manual fax  
You can lift the handset of the external  
PhotoCapture Center  
Allows you to print digital photos from your  
digital camera at high resolution for photo  
quality printing.  
telephone or you can press Hook to hear  
the receiving fax machine answer before  
you press Black Start or Color Start to  
begin sending.  
PictBridge  
Allows you to print photos directly from  
your digital camera at high resolution for  
photo quality printing.  
Menu mode  
Programming mode for changing your  
machine's settings.  
Polling  
OCR (optical character recognition)  
The process of a fax machine calling  
another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax  
messages.  
E
The bundled ScanSoft™ PaperPort™  
®
11SE with OCR or Presto!  
®
PageManager software application  
Pulse (Canada only)  
converts an image of text to text you can  
edit.  
A form of rotary dialing on a telephone  
line.  
One Touch  
Quick Dial List  
Keys on the machine’s control panel  
where you can store numbers for easy  
dialing. You can store a second number  
on each key if you hold down Shift as you  
press the One Touch key.  
A listing of names and numbers stored in  
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in  
numerical order.  
Real Time Transmission  
When memory is full, you can send faxes  
in real time.  
Out of Paper Reception  
Receives faxes into the machine's  
memory when the machine is out of paper.  
Remaining jobs  
You can check which jobs are waiting in  
memory and cancel jobs individually.  
Overseas Mode  
Makes temporary changes to the fax  
tones to accommodate noise and static on  
overseas telephone lines.  
Remote Access Code  
Your own four-digit code (--- ) that allows  
you to call and access your machine from  
a remote location.  
Paging  
This feature enables your machine to call  
your pager when a fax is received into its  
memory. The machine will also page for  
voice messages.  
Remote Retrieval Access  
The ability to access your machine  
remotely from a touch tone telephone.  
Resolution  
Pause  
The number of vertical and horizontal lines  
per inch. See: Standard, Fine, Super Fine  
and Photo.  
Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in  
the dialing sequence while you are dialing  
using the dial pad or while you are storing  
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.  
Press Redial/Pause as many times as  
needed for longer pauses.  
Ring Delay  
The number of rings before the machine  
answers in Fax Onlyand Fax/Tel  
modes.  
Photo resolution (B&W only)  
A resolution setting that uses varying  
shades of gray for the best representation  
of photographs.  
Ring Volume  
Volume setting for the machine's ring.  
215  
Scan to Media  
Tone  
A form of dialing on the telephone line  
You can scan a black & white or color  
document into a memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive. Black & white images  
can be in TIFF or PDF file format and color  
images can be in PDF or JPEG file format.  
used for Touch Tone telephones.  
Transmission  
The process of sending faxes over the  
phone lines from your machine to the  
receiving fax machine.  
Scanning  
The process of sending an electronic  
image of a paper document into your  
computer.  
Transmission Verification Report  
A listing for the last fax sent, that shows its  
date, time and number.  
Search  
®
True2Life  
An electronic, numerical or alphabetical  
listing of stored One Touch, Speed Dial  
and Group numbers.  
Adjusts the color in the image for better  
print quality by improving sharpness,  
white balance and color density.  
Speed Dial  
User Settings  
A pre-programmed number for easy  
A printed report that shows the current  
settings of the machine.  
dialing. You must press , the two digit  
code, and Black Start or Color Start to  
start the dialing process.  
Standard resolution  
203 × 97 dpi. It is used for regular size text  
and quickest transmission.  
Station ID  
The stored information that appears on  
the top of faxed pages. It includes the  
sender's name and fax number.  
Super Fine resolution (B&W)  
392 × 203 dpi. Best for very small print  
and line art.  
TAD (telephone answering device)  
You can connect an external device or  
answering machine to the EXT. jack of  
your machine.  
Telephone Answer Code  
(For Fax/Tel mode only)  
When the machine answers a voice call, it  
pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at  
an extension telephone by pressing this  
code (# 5 1).  
Temporary settings  
You can choose certain options for each  
fax transmission and copy without  
changing the default settings.  
216  
Index  
F
ControlCenter  
See Software User's Guide on the  
A
CD-ROM. .................................................  
Copy  
Access codes, storing and dialing ............88  
Accessories and supplies .......................... ii  
ADF (automatic document feeder) .... 22, 40  
Answering machine (TAD) .......................72  
Cordless telephone (non-Brother) ........... 77  
Custom telephone features on a single  
®
®
Apple Macintosh  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..................................................  
Automatic  
F
B
setting up Groups for ............................86  
Brother  
accessories and supplies ........................ ii  
FAQs (frequently asked questions) .........i  
D
Dialing  
C
access codes and credit card  
Canceling  
Direct printing  
from a non-PictBridge camera ........... 127  
from a PictBridge camera ................... 125  
Document  
Cleaning  
Connecting  
external TAD  
(answering machine) ..................... 72, 73  
two-line external TAD or telephone ......75  
Control panel overview ..............................6  
217  
 
out of paper reception ....................... 55  
printing from memory ........................ 55  
reducing to fit on paper ..................... 53  
retrieving from a remote site ........65, 66  
telephone line interference .............. 151  
at end of conversation ....................... 48  
canceling from memory ..................... 47  
changing scanner glass size ............. 41  
delayed batch transmission ............... 47  
from memory (Dual Access) .............. 46  
Real Time Transmission .................... 46  
return to factory setting ..................... 47  
telephone line interference .............. 151  
Fax/Tel mode  
E
Error messages on LCD ............... 152, 153  
while scanning a document ..............103  
Extension telephone, using ......................77  
External telephone, connecting ................76  
F
Fax codes  
Telephone Answer Code ......................77  
Fax Forwarding  
answering at extension telephones ...... 77  
Telephone Answer Code ...................... 77  
programming a number .........................56  
printing from memory ............................55  
Fax, from PC  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..................................................  
Fax, stand-alone  
G
Groups for Broadcasting ......................... 86  
at end of conversation ................. 51, 55  
F/T Ring Time, setting ........................52  
from extension telephone ...................77  
H
Help  
using Mode and menu keys ............ 172  
218  
I
N
Ink cartridges  
Network  
Printing  
See Network User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..............................................  
Scanning  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..............................................  
J
O
Jams  
One touch  
F
Out of Area (Caller ID) ............................. 71  
L
LCD (liquid crystal display) ............... 7, 172  
P
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR  
M
®
Macintosh  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..................................................  
Maintenance, routine  
See Software User's Guide on the  
replacing ink cartridges .......................162  
Manual  
CD-ROM and Help in the PaperPort™  
11SE application to access  
Mode, entering  
Multi-line connections (PBX) ....................76  
How-to-Guides. ........................................  
PhotoCapture Center  
®
®
Enhance Photos  
from PC  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..............................................  
219  
Q
®
Print settings  
Quick Dial  
Access codes and credit card  
Return to factory setting ...................121  
Printing  
Scan to USB flash memory .................121  
PictBridge  
Group dial  
setting up Groups for Broadcasting ... 86  
Speed Dial  
setting up by 2-digit location .............. 83  
setting up from Caller ID  
setting up from outgoing calls .....82, 84  
One Touch Dial  
R
Receive Mode  
®
®
Reducing  
Remote Setup  
Presto! PageManager  
®
®
See Help in Presto! PageManager  
application .................................................  
Print  
Printing  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..................................................  
Network Configuration .......................... 90  
Transmission Verification ...............89, 90  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..................................................  
Programming your machine ...................172  
220  
Resolution  
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal  
Transparencies .............18, 19, 20, 21, 201  
error messages on LCD ..................... 152  
if you are having difficulty  
S
phone line or connections ............... 148  
Safety Instructions ........................ 133, 138  
Scanning  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM. ..................................................  
Security  
F
®
PhotoCapture Center .................... 150  
printing received faxes .................... 147  
Two-line telephone system ...................... 74  
Secure function lock  
administrator password ......................33  
Serial Number  
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternative Number  
Speed Dial  
V
Volume, setting  
W
Wireless Network  
See Quick Setup Guide and Network  
User's Guide on the CD-ROM. .................  
T
TAD (telephone answering device),  
Telephone line  
two-line telephone system ....................74  
221  
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS  
(Canada only)  
NOTICE  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.  
NOTICE  
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to  
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any  
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices  
does not exceed five.  
Brother International Corporation  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
P.O. Box 6911  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA  
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.  
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,  
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6  
Visit us on the World Wide Web  
These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using  
them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that country and  
the power requirements of your multi-function center may not be compatible with the power  
available in foreign countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk and  
may void your warranty.  

Aiphone Answering Machine A User Manual
BMW R50 User Manual
Bunn Beverage Dispenser ITCB DV User Manual
Carrier 38JB User Manual
Craftsman 7174295 User Manual
Daewoo Air Conditioner DSB 071LH User Manual
Friedrich HA24K10L User Manual
Fujitsu All in One Printer FI 486PRRE User Manual
GE 2 2 9876 2 9876 User Manual
Honda Power Equipment Honda Engine GXV340 User Manual